JP2021129964A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing mixture of a screw member into a putout part.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first guidance passage formation part 202 for forming a guidance passage for guiding game balls of a ball tank formation part 201 to a putout device 200; and cover parts (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover one portion of an upper surface of the first guidance passage formation part 202. Predetermined limitation parts (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and a recessed part 336) for restricting falling of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 falling onto the cover part onto the first guidance passage formation part 202 are provided in the cover part. Plural specific limitation parts (for example, hole parts 271A to 271H) for restricting movement of screw members falling on the first guidance passage formation part 202 to the putout device 200 are provided in the first guidance passage formation part 202.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, a storage unit capable of storing a game medium supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium, and a payout unit. Some have a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and these storage portions and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by a screw member. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame, the screw member attached to the inside of the game island, and the like are removed to form the storage portion and the guide passage. If it falls into the section, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, and the game medium cannot be dispensed normally, the payout device will break down, or the screw member will be the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it was sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a screw member from being mixed in a payout portion.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201).
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out a game medium, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
A cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) for limiting the falling of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guidance passage forming portion to the payout portion (FIG. 11). , See FIGS. 12 and 27),
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect using an movable movable body as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, a structure There were some that made it possible to perform an effect similar to the effect of moving a movable body. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the pseudo-movable body is only moved and displayed in the same manner as the movable body, and the interest of the production cannot be enhanced. In view of this point, the pseudo-movable body is used. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that can enhance the appeal of display.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a top view which shows the frame for the game machine to which the game board is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the frame for a game machine. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the upper part of the back of the frame for a game machine. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10A, and FIG. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a second cover body, (B) is a GG cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an HF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a third cover body, (B) is an I-I cross-sectional view of (A), (C) is a JJ cross-sectional view of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. FIG. 5 (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is an LL cross section of (B). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of a game frame diagonally from the back. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame obliquely from the back. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. (A) is a staying state of the screw member when the ball fixing member is in the first state, (B) is a TT cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is a state when the ball fixing member is in the second state. The stagnant state of the screw member, (D), is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of the game ball on the cover part. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the feature part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface in the state which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection mode of the low voltage component and the high voltage component mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on a solder surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit on the game control board according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, FIG. It is a perspective view from. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine as a feature part 241SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory views showing the relationship between the variable display result and the variable pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various productions in a normal reach and a super reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the content and composition of various productions in super reach. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree by the execution state of development production A and development production B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the second pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a moving display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a moving display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. (A) is a figure which shows the specific movement display area of the 1st pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a figure which shows the specific movement display area of the 2nd pseudo-movable body display. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production type determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advance notice effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advance notice effect B. (A) is a flowchart showing a development effect A type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect A type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a development suggestion effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development suggestion effect type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a development effect B type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect B type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a determination effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination effect type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of an effect of super reach β mainly in normal reach. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing an example of a directing operation in a weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing an example of a directing operation in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing an example of a directing operation in a strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of a production operation of a strong super reach effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after the big hit confirmation notification. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the details of the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the light emitting display part and the mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. It is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. It is explanatory drawing for comparing the 1st pseudo movable body display and the 2nd pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing the second modification of the feature portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the third modification of the feature portion 241SG.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201).
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out a game medium, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, a cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and a cover portion of the third cover body 330). With 334)
The cover portion restricts the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). (For example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion, and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. Therefore, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect.
The predetermined limiting portion is a first retaining portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) capable of retaining a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen on the cover portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (for example, recessed grooves 326A to 326C).
The second retention portion is provided at a position closer to the payout portion (for example, the payout device 200) than the first retention portion, and is larger than the first retention portion (L22B> L21).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
The payout portion (for example, a payout device) of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement to the 200) are provided (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment.
The specific limiting portion is a plurality of hole portions (for example, hole portions 271A to 271H).
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size capable of dropping the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion before reaching the payout portion. Has (L11> L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed in the guiding passage forming portion is mixed in the payout portion. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being hindered by the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The plurality of holes have different sizes.
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the payout (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. (See Fig. 12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion. ..

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
On the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202), the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330). There is an uncovered area (eg, uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334) of the
At least a part (for example, holes 271B to 271H) of the plurality of specific restriction portions is provided at a position corresponding to the uncovered region in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the screw member is mixed into the guide passage forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped from the hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage unit
It is arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first protruding portion 224) of the game frame.
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter the upper surface of the predetermined portion (see L30 <L1, FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion and the storage portion of the game frame and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A first substrate (for example, a main substrate 11, an effect control substrate 12, etc.) attached at a position lower than the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202).
A second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion,
With
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A and the like are screw members. The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. (See Fig. 17)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected.
The first substrate has a smaller number of wires to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, a plurality of connection hole portions 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202). The number of cables C that can be connected to the cable C is the first number (for example, 20), while the second main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202 are connected. Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the number is the second number (for example, 10 lines), which is less than the first number.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached by the screw member, so that the screw member comes off due to the external force applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to the 10th or 11th form.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) and a gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3).
A mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board on the game frame,
With
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for restricting the movement of a screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion by utilizing the mounting frame of the external output substrate.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth forms.
The guide passage of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Special limiting portions (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to limit the fall to the forming portion (FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), 24. reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 13th embodiment.
The special restriction portion attaches a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attachment portion.
The screw member that has come off from the attached portion but has not retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 15th form is the gaming machine according to the 13th or 14th form.
The special retaining portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a part of the screw member.
The depth of the recess is a depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
A cover portion (for example, a cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the payout portion side.
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen on the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side in the inclined direction of the cover portion (FIG. 15, FIG. 26, FIG. 27)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The specific portion (for example, the ball stop member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344. Then, in the first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. The game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball, and can be changed to a second state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to stay than in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, a first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336)) capable of retaining a screw member dropped on the cover portion on the cover portion. For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
Unlike the first cover portion, the second cover portion provided with the specific portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) and
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 19th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 18th aspect.
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 20th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th embodiments.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having a locking portion (for example, screw members N11 to N14).
The screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is such that the screw member falls outside the guide passage forming portion even if it is removed from the game frame. It is installed (see Fig. 8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is hard to come off from the game frame, while the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion falls out of the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 21st embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 20th embodiment.
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the peripheral edge of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to the 20th or 21st form.
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are for reinforcing the game frame. It is attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the storage portion can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 20 to 22.
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to the upper position of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3) are It is characterized in that it is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 24th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 20th to 23rd embodiments.
A game board (for example, a game board 2) that can be attached to and detached from the game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) is provided.
In the region below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, the upper portion of the inclined surface (for example, the cover body 220) on which the falling screw member can flow down. Wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20, 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 24th forms.
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the first modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The guide passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending so as to incline downward toward one side (for example, the left side), and
A second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion, and
Have,
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guiding passage forming portion (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29). A) See)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 2nd to 25th forms.
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position in the vicinity of the predetermined limiting portion (for example, the recess 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the modified example 1) so as to intersect the guide passage forming portion. (See Fig. 29 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member is easily caught in the wiring and stays in the predetermined limiting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. It is composed of a board surface plate provided with (not shown), a guide rail 2b, and the like, and a spacer member integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 is formed of a non-transmissive member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area Y, an out port (not shown) is provided to which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings is taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. Has been done. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area Y by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device ( A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) for storing) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is a payout exit where prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) may be provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3) are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random number value for determining a special figure display result, determining a jackpot type, determining a fluctuation pattern, or the like. Are extracted and stored (stored) at the highest level of free entries in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the start winning process is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, and the special figure display result. Based on the numerical data indicating the random value for judgment, it is decided (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is a "big hit" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Executes normal symbol processing. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special figure game, whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a frame for a gaming machine to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming board is removed from the gaming machine frame. The glass door frame 50 is not shown in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2, a gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is detachably provided, and the game centering on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It has a glass door frame 50 provided so that the front surface of the machine frame 3 can be opened and closed, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the left side. By fixing the outer frame 60 to the gaming island (not shown) installed in, it can be installed on the gaming island.

At the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of a gaming ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a gaming ball P) provided inside a gaming island (not shown). A ball tank forming portion 201 forming a storage portion capable of storing the game balls supplied via the ball tank forming portion 201 and a first guide passage for guiding the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side are formed. The first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first passage forming body 203 including the first guide passage forming portion 202 are extended in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202.

The replenishment device 150 sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10 or the like) of a guide member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls in the circulation path of the game island and the game balls guided by the guide member 150A. The sprocket (not shown), the drive source for driving the sprocket (not shown), and the outer frame 60 are pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the open state, the gaming ball delivered by the sprocket is held so that it cannot be dropped. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming unit 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out by the ball tank forming unit 201. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, in the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is formed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B uses a plurality of screw members (not shown) to form a game island. It is fixed in place.

Further, a second guide passage forming portion 204 forming a second guide passage for guiding the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a game guided by the second guide passage forming portion 204. A payout device 200 constituting a payout unit capable of paying out balls and a game ball paid out by the payout device 200 are guided to an upper plate, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game ball to a player is formed. Pachinko game to discharge the game ball guided by the payout passage forming unit 205 and the second guide passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205. A second passage forming body 207 including a ball pulling passage forming portion 206 for forming a ball pulling passage for guiding to a discharge portion (not shown) provided in the lower portion on the back side of the machine 1 and a gaming machine frame 3 It extends vertically along the left side of the back of the building.

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a sprocket for paying out game balls by a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game. A switching valve that can switch the flow path of the ball between the payout passage and the ball removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, in the lower part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a board case 91A in which the power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 detects a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there is a game ball for paying out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200. Then, when the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the game ball is not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is paid out. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. Further, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the glass door frame 50 is connected to the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to execute a notification process indicating that a replenishment error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined position on the front surface to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in the opening 221 formed at the substantially central portion of the gaming machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-shaped body 2a composed of the above-mentioned board surface plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-shaped body 2a, and a plate-shaped body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side of the above, an effect device having a movable body 32, a substrate case 12A in which the effect control board 12 is housed, and a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and a plate shape. It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, an effect device, an electronic component, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed inside by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. Among these, the substrate cases 11A and 12A have. The board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or a plurality of screw members N20 and N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the substrate cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Alternatively, it is attached to the game board 2. Further, the cover body 220 is formed in a box shape in which the front surface is opened by a transparent synthetic resin material, and a part of the back surface is an opening / closing portion 220A that can rotate around the right side, and is one of the back surfaces of the game board 2. The part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and the cover body 220 forming the back surface of the gaming board 2 are used for gaming. In a state where the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, the outer frame 60 projects rearward from the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 in the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. In a state where the outer frame 60 of the gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island (not shown), the gaming ball can be supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the circulation path above the gaming island via the replenishing device 150. ..

(Mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203)
Next, the structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing a structure for attaching the passage forming body to the frame for a gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and an opening 221 for mounting the gaming board 2 is formed, and is above the opening 221. A metal plate 222 for reinforcement is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Further, on the back surface of the metal plate 222, an attachment member 223 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that the metal plate 222 can be covered from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by being screwed into each of the formed plurality of screw holes. A plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 is projected rearward on the right side of the mounting member 223, and is composed of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C on the left side of the mounting member 223. A three-dimensional second protruding portion 225 is projected rearward.

The first protruding portion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, and the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, a first guide passage forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223.

As described above, the mounting member 223 is formed so as to cover the upper part of the game board 2 by having the first protruding portion 224 and the second protruding portion 225 protruding rearward. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball or the like supplied from the upper part of the game island to the ball tank forming portion 201 enters the game board 2. That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and a plurality of screw members N15 attached to the mounting holes H15 from the upper side in the mounting member 223. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into each screw hole. The screw member N12 to be attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203 to the first passage forming body 203. Further, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH, of which the screw members N1, N2 and N11 to N16 are heads. A flanged screw in which a flange portion F as a locking portion is integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is harder to loosen than the screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is the head NH. It is said to be about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above-mentioned dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 made of flanged screws are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member. May be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member shall include a member such as a screw or a bolt that is separated from the attached portion when loosened. Further, the loosening prevention portion also includes a rotation stopper portion of the head NH and an adhesive and the like formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store the game ball supplied from above the game island by the ball tank forming portion 201, and also has the first guiding passage. In the above, the upper surface is formed in a concave shape so that the ball clogging is less likely to occur and the upper surface can be easily cleared when the ball clogging occurs.

Further, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the ball tank forming portion 201 where the game balls that overlap and stay in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. The game ball is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the third cover body 330 at the position where the first guide passage forming portion 202 flows into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Is designed to be rectified. However, a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, but the ball tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( The top opening of (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203. Further, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, a screw member (not shown) for assembling a skeleton or the like constituting the gaming island, and various devices arranged inside the gaming island (for example,). A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150 and the like to the skeleton and the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall off due to vibration or impact generated in the gaming island or pachinko gaming machine 1, they roll due to vibration or impact or opening and closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that it may fall inward from the uncovered region 350 of the guide passage forming portion 202 and be mixed into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity immediately above the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, and by sending a predetermined number of game balls to the ball tank forming portion 201, the game island Since it is a device that easily vibrates when a new game ball is supplied from the circulation path of the game machine or when the game machine frame 3 opens and closes, a screw member for attaching the replenishment device 150 to the skeleton of the game island or the like ( (Not shown) or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 loosen due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first induction passage forming portion 202. Very likely to fall into.

Then, when the screw member falls on the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member may move toward the payout device 200 side along with the flow of the game ball and finally be mixed in the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket and the switching valve are damaged by the screw member, the ball is clogged and the payout motor is loaded and malfunctions, or the screw member is a player together with the game ball. There was a risk that the player would feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is mixed with the payout device 200, and the payout device 200 is damaged or malfunctions, or the screw member is formed together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent the player from being paid out.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. 10A and 10B are a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 10B is a rear view showing a first passage forming body. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. It is a figure. 12A and 12B are a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 12A. 13A and 13B are a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of (A), and FIG. 13C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). 14A and 14B are a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 14B is a sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 14A. 15A and 15B are a plan view showing a third cover body, FIG. 15B is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 15A, FIG. 15C is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 3 The perspective view which shows the cover body, (E) is the perspective view which shows the ball stop member. 16A and 16B are vertical cross-sectional views showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball-stopping member is in the first state, and FIG. 16B is a first view showing a state in which the ball-stopping member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows the guide passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has an upper surface formed by a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B erected on the peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 203A. It has a ball tank forming portion 201 which is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape and is arranged on the right side, and a first guide passage forming portion 202 which is arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed from an upstream portion extending diagonally rearward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 in the front-rear direction is longer than the dimension of the first guidance passage forming portion 202 in the front-rear direction, and more game balls can be stored than the first guidance passage forming portion 202. Has been done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201. The game ball naturally flows down with the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 facing the left side.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are vertically formed in the mounting piece 261. .. Further, a mounting piece 265 is projected from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the left side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is projected forward on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view is formed at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A and the rear standing wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 (the holes 270A and 270B are formed. (See FIG. 11 (A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed at substantially the center of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B toward the downstream side. Further, in the bottom wall portion 203A of the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a connecting hole 272 for dropping the game ball is formed through the lower second guide passage forming portion 204. ..

In the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a meandering portion 273 that causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side is formed, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, the holes 271B to 271F are formed. Is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the following ball is prevented from increasing.

Further, the separation dimension L10 of the lower portions of the standing wall portions 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter (about 22 mm). It is shorter than (11 mm <L10 <22 mm). That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed so that the game ball can be guided in a row toward the downstream side.

Since the front-rear dimensions L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B are slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11> L2), the screw members N3 to N3 to be described later. Even when N6 is mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can be dropped from the holes 271A to 271H. Further, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the flow direction of the game ball) as compared with the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected holes 272. Can be reliably dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching.

That is, these hole portions 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200. Since dust, dust, or some other member other than the screw member can also fall from the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, it is possible to prevent ball clogging.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to 13 (C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. A mounting portion 311 having a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted from above, a standing wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the lower side to the right side (ball tank formation). A plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 extending downward so as to be inclined downward toward the portion 201 side), and a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the standing wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side). It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D formed so as to be elastically deformable on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

In the first cover body 310 configured in this way, the mounting portion 311 is attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 in a state where the standing wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged so as to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is one on the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The portion is covered from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 9).

In a state where the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming portion 201 side, so that the game island (not shown) becomes the ball tank forming portion 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side, they are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball holding portion 313. It is supposed to be done.

The cover portion 314 is formed with elongated holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction forming a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, penetrating vertically in a state of being arranged in a row so as to be parallel to each other. The front and rear dimensions L21 of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C are all the same, and the front and rear dimensions L21 are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21 <2R, L21 <L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in such a size that the game ball and the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 cannot be dropped. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheral edges of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

Further, since the elongated holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flow direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball P falls on the upper portions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C. If so, the game ball P can move in the flow direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a cover portion. It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the 324, and the right end portion of the cover portion 324 is attached to the left end portion of the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. The first passage forming body 203 is formed by elastically locking the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B to the locked portions 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B in a state of being close to each other. Can be attached to. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

Recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 in a state of being arranged in a row with each other. The recessed grooves 326A to 326C have different front-rear dimensions L22A to L22C, but are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C <2R). The front-rear dimension L22B of the central concave groove 326B having the longest front-rear dimension is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L22B> L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game ball and can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the concave groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B> L21).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the concave groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the concave groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B> L1, L22C> L1). ), At least the size is such that the male threaded portion NS can be accommodated.

Further, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the flow direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C) As shown in the above, when the game ball P falls on the upper part of the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15 (A) to 15 (C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 has a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , Mounting that is projected from above between a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface, and the screw member N15 is mounted from above. It is mainly composed of a mounting portion 331 formed with a hole H15 and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end portion of the upper surface of the cover portion 334, and a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 stand on the wall. It is elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By entering, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion on the upper surface toward the left side. Since a part on the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering portion 273. Further, at the position corresponding to the recess 336, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in a plan view is formed, so that a straightening vane 338 that can be elastically deformed so that the left end side swings in the vertical direction is formed. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked vertically are leveled while being guided to be pressed against the bottom wall portion 203A. (See FIG. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L23). > 2R, L23> L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the head NHs of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23> L22B).

Further, since the recess 336 is extended along the flow direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, the recess 336 is as shown in FIG. 15 (D). When the game ball P falls on the upper part of the 336, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 <L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ~ N16 does not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a left wall portion 341C to be connected, a protruding wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. Further, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (left side) so as to approach the bottom wall portion 203A, the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are placed. It is leveled while flowing down so that it can finally flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, since the rectifying plate 338 can be elastically deformed when the game balls come into contact with each other, the rectifying plate 338 is leveled (rectified) so as to push the game balls downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and an inclining position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right, and the rotating portion 341 Is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotation. The portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or flows down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204. It is possible to change to the second state (difficult), that is, the ball stop state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Therefore, in this state, the game in the second guide passage forming portion 204 It is possible to remove the ball and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C are formed. The space portion surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in a plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can stay, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 based on FIG. 17A and 17B are perspective views showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, FIG. 17B is a KK cross section of (A), and FIG. 17C is an LL cross section of (B). ..

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a cable connection portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is attached / detached on the back surface (not shown). ) And a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. A connection pinch (not shown) for sandwiching the tip of each cable C is provided at a position corresponding to each connection hole 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) for urging the connection pinch in the closing direction, that is, in the direction of sandwiching the tip of the cable C is provided. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation units 233 for releasing each connection pinch (not shown) against the urging force of the spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to the second substrate such as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the number of the second is less than the first number. The number (for example, 10) is set.

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the connection hole portions 231 and have a substantially hook shape in a side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side thereof as a swing shaft. When opening the connection pinch (not shown) described above, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation unit 233 upward or downward to swing the operation unit 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation unit 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the urging force of the spring (not shown). Cable C will be held. The operation units 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that the adjacent operation units 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation when the predetermined operation unit 233 is pressed. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223. Further, the substrate mounting frame 211 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening 234.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, a plurality of regulating portions 235 that regulate the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 forward the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted from the front side, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts on the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 to determine the arrangement position. Have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the locking portion 236 is elastically locked in a state where the movement to the front is restricted by the plurality of regulating portions 235 to mount the terminal board. It is attached to the frame 211. That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using the screw members). Can be installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C is formed during the wiring work for connecting the plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231. Need to be operated. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging from the upper part of the game island is the outer frame. The connection may be tensioned by being routed forward of the 60. That is, since the terminal board 210 tends to be loaded on the mounting portion, when the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 by the screw member, the screw member loosens and easily comes off. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is mounted by a mounting method that does not use the screw member. ing.

Further, in a state where the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operation portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side from the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation units 233 project substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation units 233 arranged side by side as described later. Further, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211.

(Attachment state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting states of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. 19A is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and FIG. 19B is a sectional view taken along line MM of FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame. 22A is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, FIG. 22B is a sectional view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and FIG. 22C is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 26A and 26B show a retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT of A, and FIG. 26C is a second state of the ball stopper. The staying state of the screw member at the time of (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19 (A), the ball tank forming portion 201 on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and its periphery are screw members N1 to for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222. Screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching N2 and the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached from the back side to the front at a position separated from the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right side and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. ..

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the back side to the front on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Since the screw member N15 is attached from the upper side to the lower side on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position lower than the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201, pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, it is extremely unlikely that the screw member N15 will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank in which the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island are received and stored, and the load of a large number of game balls is applied. Since it is arranged around the portion 201, vibration and impact are likely to occur. Therefore, a threaded member with a flange is used because the contact area with the attached portion is large and loosening is unlikely to occur.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 even if they loosen and fall off, that is, the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201. Since it is arranged below the game island, it may be mixed into the ball tank forming portion 201 which opens upward to receive and store the game ball supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. It is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the ball tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward in the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw member (L30 <L1), so that the bottom It is unlikely that the screw member is sandwiched between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and is held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is formed from the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. (L3> L2), the flanged screw member is hardly caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 (B), if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls on the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H becomes Since the screw member N15 that has fallen flows down to either the rear or the left side because it is inclined downward toward the back surface side, it is hardly held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from being mixed into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21 (A), screw members N3 to N5 for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and a substrate are provided in and around the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 on the mounting member 223, the screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 on the mounting member 223, and the third cover body 330 are attached to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to the screw member N16 is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are directed from the back side to the front at a position above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member is mounted by arranging the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 between the mounting positions of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 is separated to some extent from the mounting positions of each of N3 to N6, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko gaming machine When the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out rearward due to the vibration or impact generated in 1, the screw members N3 to N6 move rearward on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A corresponding to the mounting hole H3, a concave groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head NH when the screw member N3 is mounted on the mounting hole H3 is linear toward the rear. It is extended to. The concave groove 227 is formed so that the left and right widths are tapered toward the rear side and become shallower. However, since the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the back side, the concave groove is formed. The bottom surface of the 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 will fall into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (FIG. FIG. 22 (A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the concave groove 227 is likely to be guided so as to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but the concave groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. The screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in regions other than the concave groove 227. That is, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male screw portion NS, and when they fall on the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the peripheral edge of the head NH and the male screw portion NS Since the screw member N3 tilted as shown in FIG. 22 (B) is often in a tilted posture when the two points are in contact with the tip (see FIG. 22 (A)), vibration or impact occurs. Occasionally, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male screw portion NS so as to swing its head, and its direction may change. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the concave groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the concave groove 227, it may move linearly toward the rear or the head. The NH may move to turn to the left or right by rotating like shaking its head. That is, as shown by an arrow in FIG. 20, when it moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear, it is highly likely that it falls on the first cover body 310, and when it moves linearly toward the rear, it is the first. There is a high possibility that the cover body 320 will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage when the cover body 320 is moved so as to bend to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the concave groove 227 and then moves so as to bend rearward to the right, the first cover body. There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the elongated holes 316A to 316C, or the male screw portion NS becomes Although it is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is locked without falling off, so that the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and stays on the cover portion 314. Will be done. That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22C, when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the concave grooves 326A to 326C, or the male screw portion NS or the like. Since a part of the head NH is housed in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 but stays on the cover portion 324. That is, the concave grooves 326A to 326C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, when the product falls on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is placed on the horizontal wall portion 264. It stays in a state of being inclined to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion Since the recess 290 that opens upward is formed by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, the recess 290 is accommodated and stays in the recess 290. That is, the recess 290 is a screw member provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the first passage forming body 203, and is slightly above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H13 formed in the mounting piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it may fall into the recess 280 formed in the vicinity of the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. High (see FIG. 23 (A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, whereby the upper wall portion Since a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, it is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23 (B), when the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and is a screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N13 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward so as to bend to the right, or linearly moves rearward. In any case of moving so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. 24, the board mounting frame 211 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and stays in the recess 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or the substrate mounting frame. Although the male screw portion NS is inserted into the recess 243 formed between the 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, the head NH may stay because it is locked without falling off. That is, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the screw member N4 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation units 233. Further, in the state where the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, since a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3), these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operation unit 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the falling of the screw member N4 that has been made to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend rearward and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body is opened at the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330. Fall into. The screw member N4 that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P, falls out from between the game balls, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from any of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it finally falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. That is, the holes 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 slips out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend to the left toward the rear and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, it is placed on the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, the cover portion 334 does not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but is housed in the recess 336 and stays there. That is, the recess 336 is for limiting the drop of the screw member N4 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Consists of a predetermined restriction part of.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls off rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N6 will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right side, as shown in FIG. 25, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (payout device 200 side), so that the cover portion 334 is on the cover portion 334. The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball fixing member 340 in the above is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side comes into contact with the ball stopper 340 provided at the downstream side end portion (left end portion) that is the lower side of the cover portion 334, and is brought into contact with the downstream side (the left end portion). By restricting the movement to the left side), it stays on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the wall portion having a substantially U-shape in a plan view composed of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 is held without dropping from the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D), when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is inserted into the protruding wall. Since it can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only arranged so as to intersect with respect to the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered with the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be more reliably retained than in the second state where the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper 340 is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front right side in the mounting member 223, and is located above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut in the middle. Since it has been scratched, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it falls on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before reaching the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that the upper wall portion 225A will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N5 will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. ..

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a screw member provided at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3. N3 to N6, etc. come off due to loosening caused by vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and move backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and then cover. When it falls on the portions 314, 324 and 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the recesses 336 and the ball stopper 340 restrict the drop to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since there is a high possibility that the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 will stay on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and being mixed into the payout device 200. Further, since a vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream side) end of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left side, it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered by the cover portions 314, 324 and 334, but the ball tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills and gets on the cover parts 314 and 324 on the upstream side, the front-rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are from the diameter 2R of the game ball P. The game ball P rolls to the left side, then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered region 350, and is returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has been placed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the game ball P stays in the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the dropped screw member N stays is limited, or the falling screw member N comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be prevented.

When the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and the flow is regulated by the ball stop member 340, or it falls out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

Further, in the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the elongated holes 316A to 316C. The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the elongated hole 316B (L22B> L21). By doing so, the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It can be prevented from doing so.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 move due to vibration or impact, and are not covered provided between the cover portion 324 and the cover portion 334. When it falls from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered area 350. Even if it falls directly inward, it falls out from between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a result, the screw member falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the payout device 200. It is possible to suppress mixing.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the middle flow portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the ball tank forming portion 201. There is a region in which no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B formed at close positions and the hole 271A on the most upstream side of the holes 271A to 271H. As described above, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a vertically stacked state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which the ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming the region in which the hole portion is not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this way, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. It is possible to appropriately suppress the entry into the inside of the cover body 220 from the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suppressed from falling, and the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200 without falling to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. be able to.

Further, since the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, the screw member can be preferably removed from the hole 271H outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is formed in the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350. The screw members are often located at the upper part of the game ball because the screws are stacked one above the other, but the hole 271H is arranged on the downstream side of the straightening vane 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, Since the game ball is arranged at a position where it is rectified in one upper and lower stages, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is not covered. Even if it is mixed from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be dropped from the holes 271B to 271D to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided on the payout device 200 side of the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, as described above. Even when the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it approaches downward while moving along with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability of this is high, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are referred to the first guide passage forming portion. The recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6, which are provided in the above and are separated from the mounting holes H3 to H6 but do not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242 and 243, can be moved toward the cover portions 314, 324 and 334. It is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are the depths at which a part of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the above-mentioned elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only (or obstructing), but also because it is a retention portion that can be retained outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, a clerk of a game hall or the like finds a screw member when performing an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easy to take measures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the ball stopping member 340 as the specific portion, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is guided to the second guide. In the first state where the passage forming portion 204 can flow down, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the first state is when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the above case, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stop member 340 is set to the second state when the game balls in the first guide passage and the second guide passage are taken out, that is, the clerk of the game hall or the like is a pachinko gaming machine. While the inspection and maintenance work of 1 is performed, the ball stopper 340 is set to the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in an operating state, that is, when the clerk of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from being mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are attached. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the machine to the gaming machine frame 3 fall out of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the gaming machine frame 3, so that the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the ball It is attached at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for mounting the ball tank forming portion 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball, they are hard to come off from the game machine frame 3 as a flanged screw member, while the ball tank forming portion 201 and the ball tank forming portion 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming portion 202 are removed, they fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is a payout device 200. It can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among a plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first induction passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the peripheral edge portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 ) Is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the screw member (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200. Instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for mounting a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached. Since 201 can be firmly attached and vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having no flange portion F and having a small diameter of the head NH. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19B and 27, a screw member that has fallen is placed rearward in a region below the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game board 2 that can be attached to and detached from the gaming machine frame 3. Alternatively, the cover body 220 is provided with an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the payout device 200 side with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. By guiding the screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 side, the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H is prevented from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A arranged below. Can be prevented.

Further, the cover body 220 is generated from these drive sources by being provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the effect device having a movable body, and the effect control board 12. Although a plurality of heat radiating holes 220B for releasing heat are formed on the upper part of the rear wall portion (see FIG. 6), these heat radiating holes 220B have at least the head even if the male screw portion NS of the screw member can be inserted. It is preferable that the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. Further, since there is a high possibility that the screw member falls from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiating hole 220B is provided. It is preferable that the upper wall portion 220H is formed at a position that does not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or is formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, a rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, and the like.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29A and 29B are a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage forming portion for forming the guide passage for guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is extended so as to be inclined downward toward the left side. The first guide passage forming portion 202 has a guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface thereof is provided so that the ball stopper 340 projects upward on the upper surface of the left end portion. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention, although the embodiment in which the screw member N moving on the cover portion 334 to the left side is received and can be retained has been illustrated. Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the lower second guide passage forming portion 204.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen on the cover portion 360 move toward the left end portion side, they do not stay on the cover portion 360 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the screw member N falls directly from the left end portion of the screw member N to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the case where the recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, the third recess 361 in the cover portion 360 is located near the recess 361. 1 The cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flow direction of the game ball in the guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P that have accumulated in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination can be retained by restricting the movement by the cable C.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the screw members, the screw members N1-6, N11-16 for attaching the attachment member 223, the first passage forming body 203, and the like to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko machine. Screw members (not shown) that are attached to other parts of the gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the skeletons that make up the gaming island, and various devices (for example, not shown) that are placed inside the gaming island. , Replenishment device 150, etc.), etc.) have been exemplified for screw members (not shown) for attaching to the skeleton, etc. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, can be targeted, but at least they are pre-installed in the pachinko game machine 1. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a box-shaped ball tank forming portion 201 having an upper surface opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the standing wall portion B is applied as a storage portion capable of storing the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the storage unit can store the game ball, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202 like the ball tank forming portion 201. It does not have to be long, and may have substantially the same or shorter front-rear dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive the game ball supplied from the replenishment device 150.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out a game ball by a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out the game medium has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a payout device capable of paying out a game ball by a member other than a sprocket.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper surface is opened, and the upper surface is opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B as a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. An example is an example in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in a groove shape is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and its shape, size, and the like can be changed in various ways. The width dimension (front-rear dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than that of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the game balls may be guided in a plurality of rows so as to be able to flow down.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball and the first guide passage having the upper surface open and guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally molded is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling the members with screw members or the like. In this case, the screw member for assembling the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also the target of the screw member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a screw member can be mixed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited to this. A screw member may be mixed from a hole, a notch, or the like formed on the standing wall side of the above. Further, when the screw member can be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204 or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restriction portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion covering a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed of a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member stays on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Examples of a form in which elongated holes 316A to 316C as holes that can be formed and recessed grooves 326A to 326C and recesses 336 as recesses are applied have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member is not limited to this. A fall control part (fall inhibition part) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall from the cover part, and a movement regulation part (movement obstruction part) that can regulate (or hinder) the movement of the screw member on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the drop or movement, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, and the like may be used.

That is, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the fall of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202. It suffices as long as it can make it difficult to fall as well as the one that makes it impossible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restriction units are provided in the first guide passage forming unit 202 and are used as specific restriction units for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming unit 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 side is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement control unit (movement inhibition unit) capable of (inhibition). As a means capable of restricting or hindering the movement to the payout device 200 side, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adsorbing the screw member, and the like. These may be provided at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a corner portion between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which is not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restriction unit provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 is the screw member payout device 200. If the movement to the side can be restricted, not only the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot be moved to the payout device 200 side, but also the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, hindered) by the specific limiting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the ball is clogged because the flow of the game ball is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage. When the ball is clogged, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the clerk of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine to form the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage on the back surface. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the unit 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 but stays in the first guide passage forming portion 202, it becomes easy for the store clerk or the like to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size capable of dropping the screw member is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A are not limited thereto. As long as at least two or more holes of ~ 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes need not be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and are not limited to the above-mentioned forms and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 are applied as the first substrate to be mounted below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is limited thereto. Other substrates such as a relay substrate may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate mounted at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Other substrates such as a relay substrate may be targeted as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board exemplify a form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be directly attached to the gaming board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3 without passing through the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 as the first substrate, the substrate cases 11A and 12A in which the respective substrates are housed are the screw members N20 and N21, that is, the screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is mounted on the game board 2 by the mounting method and serves as the second board, uses a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members, that is, Although the embodiment of mounting on the board mounting frame 211 by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a locking means using a latch member or the like, a caulking pin or the like is used. It may include an attachment means, an adhesive means such as an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 is restricted from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. A form in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied has been illustrated as a special limiting portion for forming the screw member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member has a first guide passage forming portion 202. A drop control section (fall blocker) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall of the screw member, and a movement control section (movement blocker) that can regulate (or block) the movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming section 202. , It may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the fall or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a screw member can be adhered. It may be an adhesive part or the like.

That is, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Anything that can make it difficult to fall will do. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall obstruction portion), a concave portion or a hole portion as a movement restricting portion (movement obstructing portion), or the like may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 provided with the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 and the like as the special limiting portion is located near the standing wall portion 203B on the front side. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least between the mounted portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion, the present invention is not necessarily provided at a position near the standing wall portion 203B. For example, it may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first is a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. An embodiment in which a ball-stopping member 340 that can be changed is applied to a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down has been illustrated. Not limited to this, if the member is provided on the payout device 200 side (inclination lower side) in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, the movement of the screw member is restricted even if it does not have the ball fixing function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring retainer, or the like that can be (or obstructed).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball-stopping member 340 as a specific portion is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the specific portion may be provided at the end of the cover portion 314,324 on the payout device 200 side as long as it is provided at the end of the cover portion on the payout device 200 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the ball-stopping member 340 as the specific portion is composed of a member separate from the cover portion 334 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (ball stopper) may be integrally formed on a part of the members constituting the cover portion 334.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a diameter larger than that of the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head NH. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or a head. It also includes a rotating stopper and an adhesive for the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer). Further, the screw member is not limited to a member that can be attached by a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, and includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that is detached from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion to form a ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the game machine frame 3. , A mode in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, the position is laterally displaced from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If it is attached to a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) or the like. May be good.

Further, the predetermined limiting portion, the specific limiting portion, the special limiting portion, and the specific portion in the above embodiment are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also pachinko games such as a game island. Although the embodiment of restricting or restricting (inhibiting) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is attached to at least the pachinko gaming machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200. (Inhibition) It is preferable that it is formed in a possible size and morphology.

(Feature unit 053SG)
Next, a mode for carrying out the gaming machine in the feature unit 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the feature unit 053SG is a pachinko game machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a game control microcomputer for controlling the game is mounted. It is equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be applied to the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied to the effect control board. Is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting the input status according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. Input parts include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of a game medium such as a game ball or a medal, a sensor that identifies a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a player. It is a detection switch used for various settings such as the advantage of the reel, and a detection switch for detecting the opening of a door or an abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit for detecting input signals from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of output components such as a display, an LED, a motor, and a solenoid that control output according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. The output parts are, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the game machine, a display that instructs the player in the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. A display that displays the game status, an LED that indicates the game status, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor that operates a movable part used for a game such as a reel or a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer controls the output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting the output data to the output circuit.

Further, the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and the input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The output data of is transmitted via a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and the shared data bus is used. The input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus and are shared. The output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to the external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. The game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals provided by the electronic components are soldered. In the following, electronic components are mounted. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called a soldered surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has insulating properties. Consists of. Further, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are composed of conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of the above-mentioned wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the region where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed, an insulating region made of an insulator and a conductor are formed, and a ground region forming a ground is formed. The ground region is a betta land formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, more wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, while the solder surface is arranged as shown in FIG. 30-3. There are more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are aggregated on the solder surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, since many wiring patterns arranged on the solder surface extend in the same lateral direction as the long side, the distance of the wiring pattern is longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, the electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface is hindered by the electronic components. Is avoided.

Further, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through hole. Branching is performed without bypassing one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same surface.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the above-mentioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include an electronic component having one or more rows of terminals consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As described above, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is large, and the electronic components provided with the terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to connect to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction as it is without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

Further, among the electronic components including the terminal train, the input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 30-4, and a concave notch is provided on one side on the short side and the surface thereof is provided. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the component can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. Then, as shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right in FIG. 30-4, while the output circuit is arranged. , In Fig. 30-4, the notch is arranged to the right and the printing direction of the model number is from right to left, and these electronic components are arranged in the input circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. It is possible to identify whether it is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. .. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIG. 30-5, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole, and the wiring pattern is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. Connected by.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the lateral direction via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and the electronic components separated in the lateral direction can be efficiently connected. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and the data bus and the electronic components are through. Since they are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and it is less likely to be affected by noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna whose resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock) / 2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length is halved of the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, it may be reflected on the surface of the substrate and strong resonance may occur. Therefore, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) are formed to have a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. It is also prevented from emitting radio waves.

The bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and oscillator to be mounted, but the lengths (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern depend on the bus clock which is the maximum frequency expected. It is formed so as to be shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, and not to be half the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized according to the bus clock at the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock lower than the expected maximum frequency, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the plurality of lateral wiring patterns constituting the data bus are diagonally right or diagonally left, that is, the direction of the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the diagonally right direction or the diagonally left direction, which are divided into a plurality of parts, are connected by being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-5, it is mounted through a through hole (A to F shown in FIGS. 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern connecting the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. It is designed to branch into a wiring pattern on the surface side (wiring pattern connected to A to F shown in FIGS. 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects a plurality of horizontal wiring patterns divided into each other. The wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched using.

In the game control board according to the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of wiring patterns are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. The horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected by the diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface, but the plurality of horizontal wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface side. As a configuration in which horizontal wiring patterns are connected by a separate wiring pattern, that is, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on a solder surface and a mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Is also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch at a position where the horizontal wiring pattern switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. With such a configuration, the wiring pattern after branching can be bypassed. , It is possible to branch the wiring patterns that make up the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground region is formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board. The ground region formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground region and a second ground region electrically separated by an insulating region. On both the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region is formed in the region on the left side of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the region on the right side of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-7, wiring patterns for transmitting low voltage (Vcc (+ 5V) in this embodiment) signals such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit are connected. The electronic component (low voltage component) is mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low voltage component is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+ 24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as drive circuits for operating motors and solenoids, are connected are the first. It is mounted in the region on the right side where the two ground regions are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component through the ground region. Further, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region, the capacitor is used between the first ground region and the second ground region. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground region and the second ground region are electrically separated from each other. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the mounting surface. Since the insulating region that separates the ground region and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap, one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is prevented from interfering with each other.

FIG. 30-10 is a diagram showing a configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-11 is a diagram showing a connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern of the periphery, and FIG. 30-12 is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in this Example is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. In the wiring from the game control board, the signal that triggers the lottery, the signal that defines the advantage for the player such as the lottery probability, the signal for shifting to a state where the setting value can be changed, and the setting value for changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantage of the game, such as signals and signals that display information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply Wiring as a supply line is included.

As shown in FIGS. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and is not directly connected to FIG. As shown in -11, the connector is connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface, that is, a surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed around the wiring pattern. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is the wiring on the mounting surface through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal. Connected to the pattern. In particular, the through-holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through-holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect the wiring pattern from the solder surface to the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, a sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open the substrate case without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, the structure is such that fraud against the game control board is prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in a state where the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the region of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the wiring pattern is formed while avoiding the region. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the above are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite surface, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. It is designed to prevent fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Further, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered with the covering portion of the substrate case, and the area covered by the covering portion is the wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including the pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface in the area other than the covering portion. The wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is surely prevented from being short-circuited or broken from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+ 5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Further, Vcc (+ 5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board and connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor are connected. The line branched between them is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the electric power is being supplied, Vcc (+ 5V) is supplied as a driving power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+ 5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. By receiving the supply of the backup power supply VBB, the game control microcomputer holds the data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is supplied from the power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from the circuit provided in the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the said wiring pattern, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIGS. 30-14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are used as wiring patterns constituting the power supply line. , Are formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed of only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIGS. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside is generated. It is less susceptible to damage and prevents the data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, a beta land is formed on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the noise is blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface, so that the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is not easily affected by the noise. Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is on the mounting surface side as compared with the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. In the corresponding region of the above, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is the corresponding area on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. In the configuration, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmission. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the signal that triggers the lottery. The wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player are transmitted, such as, is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring pattern in which signals not directly related to the player's history, such as signals for controlling output components, are transmitted. It is used for the transmission of the signal formed on the mounting surface side by being formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player from the wiring pattern are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

Further, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern in which the reset signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern in which the operation clock is given to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. Where the wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted intersects the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, compared to the wiring pattern in which other signals are transmitted. By making the configuration formed at a position where the number of signals is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a relatively important signal is transmitted from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is as much as possible. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game-related game parts such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling the effect, a reel unit composed of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the surface of the game control board on the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is on the game component side. Installed to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the amusement park, it is often installed so that the back surfaces of the pachinko gaming machines face each other with other gaming devices such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is installed so that it is placed on the device side. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Action effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) different from the one direction is larger than the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface has the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) in the first direction (up and down). It is characterized in that it is larger than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are aggregated on the solder surface in the first direction. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, the design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square composed of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row composed of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in a second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (left and right direction). It has a rectangular shape consisting of, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction) in which the distance can be long on the solder surface without being hindered by the electronic components.

The game control board of the present embodiment includes a wiring pattern in which the wiring pattern branches from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface. The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to bypass one wiring pattern of the branch destination or to intersect one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be preferably used. Can be formed.

(Action effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects a first terminal (terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left-right direction) to a specific signal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). A specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). The wiring pattern of each is formed shorter than the specific length (λ / 2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed. ) Is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). .. According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a wiring pattern may be formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and a linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) may be formed alternately on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) and another wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching to. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ / 2). According to such a configuration, the length of the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), and thus is equal to or less than the maximum frequency. Even if the signal is transmitted, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment has a specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by having a length that does not become 1/2 (λ / 4). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern of a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ / 2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Action effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment has a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)). The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground region, and the second electronic component (second electronic component) The high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a first ground region and a second ground region separated by an insulating portion. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second voltage. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the (VDL (+ 24V)) signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground region. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which the current difference flowing through the wiring pattern connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is It may be configured to be connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even when the current difference flowing through the pattern is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground region, so that an unintended current flows back through the ground. Can be prevented.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated between the first ground region and the second ground region by the capacitor, it is possible to prevent the current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. ..

In the game control board of this embodiment, a first ground region is formed on one side (left side), a second ground region is formed on the other side (right side) facing one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component) is formed. ) Is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other even if a potential difference temporarily occurs.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, the insulating property between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even if a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region and the first ground region are formed. The insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed in corresponding regions, respectively, and the mounting surface is formed. The non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface are also formed in the corresponding regions. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

(Action effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side instead of the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the advantage of the game (the signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed, and the set value is changed. It is characterized by including a signal for inputting or outputting a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display (wiring for inputting or outputting). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to the advantage of the game.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since it is not formed, by displaying the information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering portion that covers the area around the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on a solder surface in a region covered with a covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), so that the connector is formed from the board case. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portion of the (connectors CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using a through hole for connecting to an electronic component.

(Action effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, so that the game control is performed. The microcomputer for game control can hold the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used as the game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) supplied to the computer is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which the electronic parts are not mounted, so that the electronic parts are bypassed. Since it is not necessary to form the data and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the game component (liquid crystal display, effect control board that controls the effect, etc.) side related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (other game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other game devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is solid in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is higher than the wiring pattern (Vcc1 to 3) for supplying another power source. It is characterized in that there are few points that intersect with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls a game is described, but another board mounted on a game machine, for example, a board that controls an effect. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming medium, a substrate that controls the addition of gaming value, a substrate that relays between the substrates, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, a configuration different from that of the game control board of the first embodiment will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating property. Consists of. Further, a plurality of through holes are formed on the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Further, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the regions where the wiring patterns of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are not formed.

Similar to the game control board of the first embodiment, the game control board of the second embodiment also has an input circuit and an output circuit mounted therein. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape and have short sides. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be specified by the direction of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the drawing and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the drawing and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to specify whether these electronic components are an input circuit or an output circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. 30-20, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extend in the vertical direction. ..

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction via the data bus, first, the data bus on the solder surface where the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. Branch to the mounting surface side wiring pattern that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. It becomes. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and further, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit Is connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit and output circuit connected to the data bus. Therefore, the noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board in the vicinity of the upper side in the drawing, and a data bus is provided. The wiring pattern to be configured is formed in a region closer to the lower side in the drawing of the game control board, that is, a region closer to the other side facing the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, the area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is widely secured between the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input and output and the electronic components outside the game control board and the data bus. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game (does not trigger a lottery). Input signals from the first input circuit that detects the input of sensors and switches (detection signals of sensors and switches, etc.) and the second input components that are more important than the first input components (detection signals of sensors and switches that trigger lottery, advantageous Based on the output data from the second input circuit that detects the input of the second input circuit that detects the input of the setting value that defines the degree, the game control microcomputer, etc., the operation of the moving parts such as the solenoid and motor according to the progress of the game. The first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component, and the second output that displays various indicators, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. The second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when the game is played for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance is mounted.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to the data bus, and the input data and the output data are transmitted via the data bus. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring patterns constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branch to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of points, and are vertically formed on the mounting surface. It is connected to a wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position N in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the positions O and P in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branched on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are external as they are. It is connected to the output terminal, and the remaining wiring pattern is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position S in the figure. Is connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the input circuits and output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern length than the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for controlling the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, an output signal is output to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter in the first output circuit that outputs the game than in the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the data bus so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is other than the performance indicator. Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult for the content of the performance display to be illegally modified due to the arrangement of illegal parts or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-21, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure corresponds to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. It is connected to the external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, it is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side outputs an output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the two output circuits, the wiring pattern is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is also connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the external device according to the progress of the game. Well, even with such a configuration, in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The second input circuit of the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and the input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position T in the drawing, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side. At the position of, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole, and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. On the other hand, the second input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intervention, the input data based on the important input signal is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit, and is sent to the game control microcomputer. It will be transmitted.

(Action effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from It is possible to prevent the data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. However, the output circuit is an input circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. With such a configuration, it is based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control computer to the game control computer. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit to be used, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The output circuit is a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit includes a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the parts, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the movement of the movable part from being affected according to the progress.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. With such a configuration, the game progresses. The second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays is from the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shortened, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise and the like, which affects the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Further, like the game control board of the first embodiment, the first ground region on which the low voltage component is mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the high voltage component is mounted on the right side. When the two ground regions are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the two ground regions and outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground region because it belongs to the low voltage component. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting it in the region, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, and it is possible to prevent the second output circuit from being overloaded. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and the data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized in that it branches into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for performing the operation and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal that outputs an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for performing the output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The first input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and the first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer. 2 The second input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the input component to the game control computer, and the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control computer. The first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. The second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without going through a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is for game control without going through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface on the opposite side to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed through the through hole. It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side). According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display is more up to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display. Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify the display contents due to the placement of unauthorized parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientations of the components are different. With such a configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

The structure of the game control board in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to the first and second embodiments, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The game control board in the third embodiment is characterized by the structure of the electronic component and the through hole to be mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic component and the through hole will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in the third embodiment, FIG. 30-23 is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view from above. , It is a perspective view from the bottom of a specific electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and as shown in FIGS. 30-23 (A) and 30-23 (B), the specific electronic component is fixed to the substrate at the bottom of the specific electronic component. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components, and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components. Is provided. Further, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connecting terminal is illustrated as a specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, or may be applied. An electronic component that does not have a fixing terminal but only a connecting terminal may be applied as a specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided on the game control board are usually composed of through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is usually subjected to copper plating, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, so that the through hole becomes a mounting surface and a solder surface. It is a through hole that conducts with. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), the specific through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through hole is not copper-plated and the through hole is not conductive between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper-plated, so that the solder in the through hole reaches the mounting surface. Although it flows up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), since the through hole is not copper-plated, the inside of the through hole is filled. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through hole, inserting the connection terminal into the normal through hole, and soldering from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side. Therefore, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by solder because it rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the component is mounted.

In particular, since the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it cannot be found even if the part is replaced illegally, and if the model number is hidden in the type test, the part configuration cannot be specified and the test is not passed, and approval There is a risk that you will not be able to receive the solder, or you may not be allowed to install it in the game store because you cannot confirm the model number when installing it in the game store. By fixing with, such a problem can be prevented.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals and electric power of specific electronic components, a problem occurs even if the electrical connection is weakened when soldering through a specific through hole. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted into the through hole and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured when the solder reaches the mounting surface.

(Action effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted through a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the through hole and the terminal are fixed by soldering, and a specific through hole is formed in which a specific electronic component is fixed among a plurality of electronic components. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole is soldered because the mounting surface and the solder surface do not conduct with each other and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. At that time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a defect.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, since it is the terminals for fixing the specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) that are soldered to the specific through holes, the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, there is no problem even if the electrical connection is weakened.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered to the specific through holes. A terminal (connection terminal) that propagates the signal or power of the component may be inserted and soldered. According to such a configuration, the solder rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of terminals that propagate signals and power of specific electronic components with other terminals.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configurations as those of Examples 1 and 2 have the same effects as those described in Examples 1 and 2. Further, the modifications illustrated with reference to Examples 1 and 2 can also be applied to Example 3.

(Invention of Feature 053SG)
As described above, the feature unit 053SG includes the inventions shown below. That is, conventionally, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine is generally provided with a substrate on which an electronic device is mounted. A board of this type has been proposed in which data is input / output between a control means such as a CPU and another electronic device using a single data bus. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the substrate is preferably formed, the gaming machine of (1) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1).
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed through a through hole. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and the data bus is the board (game). The control board) is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) facing the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively used.

The gaming machine of (5) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (game control board).
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display is more like the control means (game control) than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another display. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the computer) is shortened.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, which is an illegal component. It is possible to make it difficult to improperly modify the display contents due to the arrangement of the above.

The gaming machine of (6) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5).
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the substrate so that the orientations of the components are different.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine (7) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6).
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, the influence of noise on the control means can be prevented.

The gaming machine of (8) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game becomes the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the part from being affected.

The gaming machine of (9) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
In the board (game control board), electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and the data bus is connected through a through hole. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern of the first surface (mounting surface) on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the first surface side is used to output according to the progress of the game by utilizing the wiring pattern of the first surface connected from the data bus formed on the second surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, they are formed on the second surface to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since it is not necessary to branch from the generated data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The gaming machine (10) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer). Input data based on input signals from the circuit (first input circuit) and the second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control). A third electronic component (first output component, second output) based on the second input circuit (second input circuit) transmitted to the (microcomputer) and the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a component).
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus.
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (microcomputer for game control) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus to which the input data from another input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (11) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the input circuit transmitted to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (12) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game becomes the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and is displayed according to the progress of the game. Can be prevented from affecting the.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can store a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball P). The storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201), the payout section capable of paying out the game medium (for example, the payout device 200), and the upper surface are opened to guide the game medium of the storage section to the payout section. A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 or a second guide passage forming portion 204) forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) and the guide passage forming portion of the guide passage forming portion. The cover portion (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface and the pseudo movable body display are displayed from the first display position to the first display. A display means capable of moving and displaying to a second display position different from the position, a movable body movable from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect. A predetermined limiting portion (for example, length) for limiting the falling of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion is provided on the cover portion. Holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the threaded member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion is moved to the payout portion. A plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the effect executing means displays the pseudo-movable body display on the first. It is possible to execute a pseudo movable body display effect of moving and displaying the movable body from the display position to the second display position, and a movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position, and the effect executing means. When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body display effect is performed without the movable body effect being executed in the predetermined period by the effect executing means. Examples thereof include a gaming machine in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

That is, by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, it is possible to make the gaming machine less likely to break down, and the player can perform the pseudo movable body display effect when the pseudo movable body display effect is executed. Since the attention will be paid to the production in the expectation that the movable body production will be executed, the interest of the production can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not easily break down when installed in a gaming field and easily attracts the interest of the player.

Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect. As an example of the form of the above, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position different from the first display position. The display means, a movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and an effect execution means that can execute the effect, and the effect execution means displays the pseudo-movable body. It is possible to execute a pseudo-movable body display effect of moving and displaying the movable body from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position. When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. Examples thereof include a gaming machine in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Feature unit 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position) and
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the effect position).
With
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are common directions ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are common downward directions).
The movement display of the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo-movement). The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 40-37).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by being able to perform an effect having an impact faster than the movement of the movable body by displaying the pseudo movable body.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided.
In the pseudo-movable body display, when the body moves from the first position (for example, the first origin position) to the second position (for example, the first effect position) different from the first position, a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount is performed. It is a display that imitates a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be performed.
The display means can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position corresponding to the first position to the second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display an image. The display device 5 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 vertically between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Some parts),
The pseudo-movable body display displays a recoil operation of a specific movement amount when the movement is displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100). Is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position.
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the recoil motion display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position. 40-38),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can realize a simulated effect similar to that of the movable body without mounting the movable body, and the recoil that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position. By displaying the movement in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position) and
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the effect position).
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position. 1 The part that can be moved and displayed at the effect display position) and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position).
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed (for example, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, the development using the mounted movable body 32. When the effect A and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. (Big hit expectation) is high. See Fig. 40-11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form A4 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z200 can be moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position),
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
With
The effect executing means is
A special suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-movable body display is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a notice effect A foretelling the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a big hit).
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the development of a strong super reach effect), and
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and suggests that the notification effect is executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. Development suggestion production that suggests the possibility that
Is feasible and
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable body display is displayed by any one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) in which the expectation degree at which the notification effect is executed is different.
The display means
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( 40-25 (C)-(F)),
In the predetermined effect, after the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, it is hidden without performing the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (FIGS. 40-26 (A). )-(J), see FIG. 40-27 (A)),
When the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position is hidden before the notification effect is executed, the notification-related image (for example, the notification-related image (for example,) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 40-26 (F) to (J) and 40-27 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion effect, since the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the same way as the movable body as a structure, attention should be paid to whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, in the predetermined effect, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the moving display in the same manner as the movable body, and the display is not returned from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is hidden, the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestion of executing the notification effect.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the first initial display. A part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, and a part that can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5). ,
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
With
The effect executing means is
A special effect for notifying that the player is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state) and
A specific effect suggesting that the special effect is executed before the special effect is executed (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies that the determined effect is executed), and
Is feasible and
The display means
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed.
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then the first display is displayed from the second display position. It is hidden without being moved to a position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special effect (for example, an aspect at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in a display area including the second display position. It is possible (see FIGS. 40-27 (B) (D)-(F)),
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed in the special effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then the first display is performed from the second display position. Move to the position and display it, and then hide it (see FIGS. 40-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the display of the suggestive image is prioritized from the second display position to the movement display in the same manner as the movable body as a structure. 1 Since it is hidden without returning to the display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of executing the special effect, while in the special effect, the pseudo movable body display moves and displays in the same way as the movable body. , It is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the first initial display. A part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position)
The display means
The pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position).
The movement display of the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position (FIG. 40-40 (A)-(C)),
In the display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image (for example, an image showing a plurality of glass fragments in which the glass is cracked) that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo movable body display. It is possible to display the effect image Z71) in which the Z71A is scattered (see FIGS. 40-31).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed quickly without deteriorating the visibility, and the movement display can be suitably impressed by the player by emphasizing the movement display with a specific image. can.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a first pseudo-movable body). The display Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the image display device 5 shifts the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. Equipped with a part that can be moved and displayed)
The first pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIGS. 40-16 (B)).
The second pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIGS. 40-16 (C)).
The display means
The first pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 40-40 (A) to (C)). ),
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position. (See FIGS. 40-40 (A)-(C)),
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The speed is different (for example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. It is faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position (see Fig. 40-40),
When the first pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when it is displayed (for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). When the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the PBY-3 or the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation) differs between when the pattern PBY-1 which is moved to the display position and displayed and the pattern PBY-2 which is moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position are executed. 40-10, see 40-20 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed, and the first pseudo-pseudo in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different. The player can be made to recognize the movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display by the difference in the speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of the form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A7.
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first effect position) different from the first position is provided.
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a recoil motion of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIGS. 40-36).
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a recoil motion display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIGS. 40-36).
The specific movement amount is larger than the constant movement amount (for example, the first movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the recoil motion display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position. 40-38),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can realize a simulated effect similar to that of the movable body without mounting the movable body, and the recoil that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position. By displaying the movement in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of the form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A8.
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (for example, an origin position) to a second position (for example, an effect position) different from the first position is provided.
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the moving display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (for example, the moving distance L1) (FIG. 40-16),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the pseudo movable body display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable body, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of the form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A9.
The pseudo-movable body display includes an effect display unit (for example, effect display units Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (for example, mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B).
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the effect display unit (see FIGS. 40-36 (B1) and B2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A10.
The movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo-movable body display is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the first pseudo-movable). The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 40-37).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the form A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A11.
The moving period between the first position and the second position of the movable body includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (FIGS. 40-39 (A). )reference),
The movement display period of the pseudo-movable body display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 40-39 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A12.
The pseudo movable body display includes a light emitting display unit (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
The display means can display the light emission display unit by moving the pseudo movable body display to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 first. A portion in which the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed in substantially the same cycle after moving to the effect position. (See FIG. 40-31 (D)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the pseudo movable body display that is moved and displayed at the second display position.

The gaming machine of the form A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A13.
The pseudo movable body display includes a light emitting display unit (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
The display means does not emit light from the light emitting display unit when the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed (see FIGS. 40-31).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect by making the (incomplete) pseudo-movable body display during the moving display inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form A15 is the gaming machine according to the form A13 or the form A14.
The movable body includes a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved to the second display position and displayed, the display means displays the light emission of the light emission display unit in the same manner as the light emission of the light emitting unit (the effect control CPU 120 displays the light emission of the light emission display unit. A portion in which the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first effect position. See FIG. 40-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A17.
The display means can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from the first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the second pseudo-movable). The part where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position, and the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves and displays from the first special display position to the second special display position. Are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the advance notice effect A, and the advance notice effect B. The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position. See FIGS. 40-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with the movable body.

The gaming machine of the form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A16.
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction of display. It can be moved and displayed (see FIGS. 40-43).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 32. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the mounted movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the mounted movable body 32 to the mounted movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the mounted movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The production control CPU 120 controls the audio output, the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and the control of the mounted movable body 32 (supply of the signal for operating the mounted movable body 32, etc.). You may want to do it.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the out-of-game symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the out-of-game symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 34 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the jackpot type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "out of place", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 36 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 36 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 36 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 36 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 36 (A).

As shown in FIG. 36 (B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 36 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 37, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit judgment values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the common numerical range (of the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1) When only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value is within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range. The numbers are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving is out, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio at which the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio for all the set values, so that the gambling property depends on the set value. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, with regard to the time-saving loss, which is assigned a common number of judgment values for each setting value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from the time-saving loss reference value of 65317 in any setting value, it can be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time reduction.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the mounted movable body 32, such as control for driving the mounted movable body 32 to return to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a mounted movable body. Control is performed to operate various effect devices such as the drive operation of 32. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the mounted movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, command to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output of. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command that specifies to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature unit 241SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-1 to 40-40. In the following, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals to the configurations having the same functions as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation or different in form and arrangement position. The points different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 40-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed to be slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 40-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Is possible. Further, the button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the effect control CPU 120 can turn on / off the button LED 62.

FIG. 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 40-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped and then the power supply is restarted. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, and is executed when neither the first hold storage nor the second hold storage exists in the special symbol normal processing, as will be described later. It is a command transmitted by the demo display setting, and the customer waiting demo effect is executed when a predetermined period elapses after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted.

The commands shown in FIG. 40-3 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 40-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 40-4, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for use is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. As will be described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 40-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, individual special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the present embodiment) (about 1 in the present embodiment). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 40-5 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the present embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 40-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled, any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40-6 (B). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type includes high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the jackpot game by the "probability variation jackpot C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 40-7). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-6 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 40-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach variation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... In this case, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... May be different. Further, although the super reach α and the super reach β are provided as the super reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type as in the normal reach fluctuation putter.

The variation pattern in the present embodiment includes a variation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 40-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the present embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the fluctuation patterns of super reach, the fluctuation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ have a variable display period longer than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (60 seconds). Has been done.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variable display result is selected. Using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern). To decide from. Further, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and the variation is made using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 40-8 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is different. It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern of the superreach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability jackpot. In addition to being easy, the super reach β is easier to determine than the super reach α, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α out-of-range variation pattern), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β outlier).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β outlier).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β outlier).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

As described above, when the variable display result is "off" in the present embodiment, the special figure variable display time is normal based on the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure being 3 or 4 or the like. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) shorter than the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed. However, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-8 (B), when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot in the high base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ) It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the low base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern). ..

As shown in FIG. 40-8 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 are determined. The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. It is assigned, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. , PB1-4 are assigned 400 determination values. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot. Since the fluctuation pattern is easily determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 Determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ outlier).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Assigned, 10 determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time reduction state), the special figure variable display time is a fluctuation of the normal non-reach deviation based on the time reduction state. Since the variable display is executed at a high rate due to the variation pattern (PA1-4) for shortening, which is shorter than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display result is displayed next while preventing the game from being delayed. It is possible to shorten the period until it becomes a big hit. The fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are considered to be fluctuation patterns that can be executed only in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in the present embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game. It includes a control counter setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 40-2 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. This effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution by the hold storage of the first special figure, and the buffer numbers 1-1 to 1 to the buffer numbers 1 to 4 corresponding to the hold storage 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to variable display during execution by hold storage of the second special figure, buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to hold storage 1 to 4 of the second special figure The data that composes the start prize reception command buffer, in which entries that can store data such as the start opening prize specification command, the symbol specification command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, are set in association with each of them, It is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, the four commands of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command that constitute these one set are the buffer numbers corresponding to the start opening prize designation command and the hold storage number notification command. Stored in the entry of.

The stored contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to the buffer numbers 1 to 0 to the buffer numbers 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure are the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1"" when the start condition is satisfied. ) Is started, as will be described later, the contents are shifted upward one by one, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are stored. , It is cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is finished. Similarly, the stored contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to the buffer numbers 2 to 0 to the buffer numbers 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure are the highest held storage (buffer number "2" when the start condition is satisfied. When the variable display of -1 ") is started, it is shifted upward one by one as described later, and the buffer number" 2-0 "that stores the contents of the hold storage for which the start condition is satisfied is stored. The stored contents are cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is terminated.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening. It is stored from the entry), and at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, it is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) in the empty entry of the buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. .. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning is the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (buffer number "1-0" or "2-". What is stored in the entry of "0") is deleted, and is stored in the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in the buffer number "1-1". Each command is shifted to the buffer number "1-0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". Then, each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Will be done. Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Direction during Super Reach)
Here, the production during the super reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-9. FIG. 40-9 is a diagram showing an execution period of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 40-9, in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode after starting the variable display. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, the super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as the variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach display mode. After the reach effect is finished, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit in the normal reach effect in the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) as an effect different from the variable display effect (expected). It is possible to execute the advance notice effect A or the advance notice effect B for notifying the degree). Further, in the normal reach effect in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute the development effect A that notifies that the weak super reach effect is developed (contents that are advantageous for the player).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the weak super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) develops into a strong super reach effect (contents advantageous for the player). It is possible to execute a development suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute the development effect B that notifies the content).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a determined effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit or a miss in the strong super reach effect in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ). ..

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation, it becomes a big hit or miss in the normal reach production without developing into a weak super reach production, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach production in the normal reach production. In the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ), it develops into a strong super reach production in a weak super reach production.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reach with higher expectations than weak super reach (big hit expectation; normal reach <super reach). α <super reach β <super reach γ).

Further, in the normal reach and the super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, and common or at least partially similar types of super reach effects may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the type of super reach is not limited to the above three types, and may be one type, two types, or four or more types.

In the feature unit 241SG, in the above-mentioned advance notice effect A and advance notice effect B, development effect A, B, development suggestion effect, and decision effect, the mounted movable body 32 which is a structure is moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later is performed. And the second pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, and the second pseudo-movable body display will be described.

(Flow of development of pachinko game machines)
First, in order to understand the background of mounting the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, the second pseudo-movable body display, and the like as described above on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The outline of the flow of the above will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-12. FIG. 40-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the flow of development of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40-12, when the development of a predetermined pachinko gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) starts, it is first clarified what to convey to the game store and the player and what to feel. Create a plan document, etc. (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specifications, game flow, reach and other production configurations, board configurations, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the model will be examined.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (primary prototype, design mock) of the board (game board), images and materials that can image variable display, etc., a specification confirmation table, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but the reason why multiple movable bodies cannot be mounted (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc. Durability) and other problems may occur.

Next, a video such as a variable display or an effect is created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the non-mounted movable body is created. .. Since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display is inferior in impact to the case where the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the recoil display operation and the speed of the movement display when the movement display is stopped are performed. It is often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board surface (game board) including images such as variable display and production is created, and the variable display, core production, movement of the movable body, etc. are confirmed (step 241SGS004). If there is no problem, a mold product or the like for the board surface (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by mounting a plurality of movable bodies capable of providing an impactful effect to the player, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced and the effect can be diversified. It is often difficult to install more than one. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, the moving display of the pseudo movable body display that imitates the non-mounted movable body is often used.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature unit 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems described above, one movable body ( For example, the mounting of the mounted movable body 32) was decided, and the mounting of other movable bodies (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and was not mounted. Instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are imitated. The moving display of the second pseudo-movable body display and the moving display will be described as being adopted.

In the above description, the pseudo-movable body display exemplifies a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that are finally not mounted. It is not limited, and although it was possible to mount a movable body, a pseudo movable body display may be used in order to diversify the production. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or will be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
Hereinafter, the mounted movable body 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-13. 40-13 are views showing a moving mode of the mounted movable body, and FIG. 40-13 is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 40-13 (A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of an effect unit 32A and a mechanism unit 32B which are formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in the front view and are decorated on the front surface, and are composed of the effect unit 32A. The left and right sides of the mechanism unit 32B extending to the left and right sides are supported by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, so that the upper origin position (FIG. 40-13 (A)). ), The position indicated by the solid line) and the effect position below the origin position (the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-13 (A)) can be moved in the vertical direction. The mechanism unit 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the effect unit 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L and 201R include the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, and the driven gears 203L and 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R and the driven gears 204L and 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L and 203R. , The rotating shafts 205L and 205R with the driven gears 204L and 204R fixed to the lower end and facing in the vertical direction, the moving bodies 206L and 206R inserted into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, and the mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin positions. It mainly has a possible mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 40-2) that can emit light of a light emitting unit 208A built in the effect unit 32A and composed of the letter "X".

The mounted movable body 32 is inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction at the left and right ends (guided portions) of the mechanical portion 32B, and is locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. By doing so, it is held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the locked state is released while being held at the origin position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position by its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism unit 32B. Comes into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R and is restricted from moving downward so that the moving body stops at the effect position.

Further, while spiral groove portions 205A are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have locking portions (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portions 205A on the inner peripheral surface. Since it is formed and the rotation around the rotation shafts 205L and 205R is regulated, the rotation shafts 205L and 205R can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation shafts 205L and 205R in the forward and reverse directions by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can be dropped from the origin position to the effect position by its own weight, and after the fall, the rotating shaft 205L is driven by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R as shown in FIG. 40-13 (B). , 205R is rotated to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies 206L and 206R are raised from the effect position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(1st pseudo movable display and 1st non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-14. 40-14 is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display, and FIG. 40-14 is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

As shown in FIG. 40-14 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 shown in FIG. 40-14 (A) was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but it was not mounted due to various circumstances. It is said that the image imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a directing unit M100A formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the front view and decorated on the front surface, and a mechanical unit M100B. The left side of the mechanism unit M100B extending to the left is supported by the drive mechanism M101 arranged on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 40-14 (B)) is supported. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position indicated by the dotted chain line and the first effect position below the first origin position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIGS. 40-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 faces the movable body motor M102, the driven gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, the driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, and the driven gear M104 fixed to the lower end in the vertical direction. The rotating shaft M105, the movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, the moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and the effect unit M100A are built in and viewed from the front. It mainly has a non-mounted movable LED (not shown) capable of emitting light from a circular light emitting unit M108A.

Further, the effect unit M100A has four effect movable units M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting unit M108A with a streak-like decoration on the front surface, and the effect movable units M110A to M110D are close to each other. It is possible to change between an effect state (a state indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-14 (B)) and a second effect state in which the effect movable portions M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting unit M108A.

In the first non-mounted movable body M100, the left end portion (guided portion) of the mechanical portion M100B is inserted (guided) into the rotation shaft M105 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is locked to the movable body solenoid M107. 1 Held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and the locked state is released while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped from the first origin position by its own weight, and the mechanism unit M100B The left and right ends of the solenoid come into contact with the moving body M106 to restrict downward movement, so that the vehicle stops at the first effect position.

Further, while a spiral groove portion M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, the moving body M106 is formed with a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion M105A on the inner peripheral surface. Since the rotation around the rotation shaft M105 is restricted, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotation shaft M105 in the forward and reverse directions so that the rotation shaft M105 can be moved in the vertical direction. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can be dropped from the first origin position to the first effect position by its own weight, and after the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped, the rotating shaft M105 is rotated by the movable body motor M102 to move the moving body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first effect position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 40-14 (A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and is an effect display unit Z100A corresponding to the effect unit M100A and a mechanism unit. It has a mechanism display unit Z100B corresponding to the M100B and a light emitting display unit Z108A corresponding to the light emitting unit M108A. Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 40-16 (B)). ), The first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction (FIG.). See 40-17 (A)). Further, the effect unit M100A has the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the effect movable units M110A to M110D, and has a first effect display state corresponding to the first effect state and a second effect display state corresponding to the second effect state. It is possible to change to the production display state.

(2nd pseudo movable display and 2nd non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-15. 40-15 is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the second pseudo-movable body display, and FIG. 40-15 is a diagram showing a moving mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

As shown in FIGS. 40-15 (B) and 40-15, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 shown in FIG. 40-15 (A) was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but it is not possible due to various circumstances. It is said to be an image imitating the mounted second non-mounted movable body M200.

Regarding the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 40-15 (B) and mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 40-15 (C)) showing different operation modes at the beginning of development are shown. The mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mounted movable body itself could not be mounted, so the movement corresponding to the mounting plan 1 described below is used as the second pseudo movable body display Z200. The display and the movement display corresponding to the mounting plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-15 (B) and 40-15 (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a directing unit M200A formed in a front view circular shape and decorated on the front surface. A first effect device (mounting plan 1: FIG. 40-15 (mounting plan 1: FIG. 40-15), which is composed of a mechanism unit M200B and is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A in which the lower end of the mechanism unit M100B is arranged below the image display device 5. B)) and the second effect device (mounting plan 2: see FIG. 40-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanism unit M100B is supported by the second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5. It is incorporated in each of.

As shown in FIG. 40-15 (B), the first drive mechanism M201A is a rotating body rotated by a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202 and a movable body motor (not shown). It has an M203 and a guide rail M204 that guides the effect unit M200A so as to be movable in the vertical direction. One end of the mechanism portion M200B is rotatably supported around a rotation shaft facing the front-rear direction with respect to the base member M202, and a connecting shaft M205 projecting from the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the rotating body M203 slides. An elongated hole M206 that can be inserted is formed.

Therefore, in the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A, the rotating body M203 is rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and the mechanism portion M200B is rotated around the rotation axis. The lower first specific origin position (origin position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-15 (B)) and the first specific effect position above the first specific origin position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 40-15 (B)). It is possible to move up and down between the position).

Further, the effect unit M200A includes a rotating unit M207 having a circular front view and a non-mounted movable LED (not shown) capable of emitting light from a plurality of (for example, five) light emitting units M208A to M208E provided in the rotating unit M207. The non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating unit M207 rotates, and the light emitting units M208A to M208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-15 (C), the second drive mechanism M201B is a driven gear that meshes with the movable body motor M212, the drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and the drive gear M213. It mainly has an M214 and a rotation shaft M215 that faces the left-right direction in which the driven gear M214 is fixed to the left end. Further, while a spiral groove portion M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, the mechanical portion M200B extending upward from the effect portion M200A is locked on the inner peripheral surface so as to be able to be locked to the groove portion M215A. A portion (not shown) is formed, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is regulated.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B rotates the rotation shaft M215 in the forward and reverse directions by the movable body motor M212, so that the second specific origin position on the left side (FIG. 40-15 (C)). ) Is movable in the left-right direction between the origin position indicated by the two-dot chain line) and the second specific effect position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 40-15 (C)), and the second specific origin. It is possible to stop at the second intermediate effect position, which is intermediate between the position and the second specific effect position.

As shown in FIG. 40-15 (A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and is an effect display unit Z200A corresponding to the effect unit M200A and a mechanism unit. It has a mechanism display unit Z200B corresponding to the M200B, a rotation display unit Z207 corresponding to the rotation unit M207, and light emission display units Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light emitting units M208A to M208E.

At the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable display Z200 Therefore, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E can be light-emittingly displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors) without considering the cost aspect.

Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (FIGS. 40-16). (See (C)), the second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and the second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position can be moved and displayed in the left-right direction (FIG.). See 40-17 (B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-16 and 40-17. 40-16 shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) the moving display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (C) the moving display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. It is a figure. 40-17 is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable body display and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 40-16 (A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the effect unit 32A overlaps at the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the effect position where the effect unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at the center, and the movement distance from the origin position to the effect position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 40-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first initial display position in which the lower part of the effect display unit Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. The first initial display can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction between the first effect display position where the effect display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at a position substantially below the center of the display area of the image display device 5. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 40-17 (A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a first specific initial display position in which the upper part of the effect display unit Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , The first specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5 can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction. The specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L2A.

As described above, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position, similarly to the first non-mounted movable body M100. Not only can the movable range between them be moved and displayed in the vertical direction, but also a specific movement between the second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and the second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position is possible. The range can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-16 (C), in the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the lower part of the effect display unit Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first specific initial stage is displayed. It is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the display position and the first specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at a substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5. The moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-17 (B), in the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the right part of the effect display unit Z200A is displayed at the left part position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the left-right direction between the initial display position and the second specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at a substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5. , The moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, has a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific effect corresponding to the first specific effect position. Not only is it possible to move and display the movable range between the display position in the vertical direction, but also the second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and the second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position. The specific movable range between the position and the position can be moved and displayed in the left-right direction.

Further, the moving display distance L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is longer than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the moving display distance L3 of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Shorter than (L2> L1> L3). Further, the moving display distance L2A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is longer than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the moving display distance L3A of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. And the movement display distance is longer than L2A (L3A> L2A> L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that has more impact than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIGS. 40-16, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are composed of the effect display units Z100A and Z200A and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B. Is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and is produced by the drive mechanism M101, the first drive mechanism M201A, and the second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display units Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to express the moving display more realistically.

That is, the pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) refers to a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, and a virtual movable body. This is a simulated display, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display unit, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 40-25 (H)).

In addition, a display in which a part of the display mode is different from that of the modeled movable body, a display in a mode that cannot be realized by the modeled movable body (for example, a deformed display or a deformed display) or a moving display (for example, a high-speed moving display, etc.) ) Is possible.

Further, the pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or a moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or a moving image of a movable body as an actually created structure. There may be. Furthermore, when moving the pseudo-movable body display, the sound effect that is output when the movable body is moved and the sound effect that is the same as or similar to the impact sound that occurs when the movable body is stopped can be output, or the pseudo-movable body display can be displayed as an effect. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc., or outputs deep bass from the speakers 8L, 8R to generate a pseudo impact, which is more realistic. It becomes possible to provide the production to the player.

Next, details of various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-10. FIG. 40-10 is a diagram for explaining the contents and configurations of various effects in Super Reach.

(Notice production A)
As shown in FIG. 40-10, the notice effect A can be executed when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is displayed after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. It is suggested that the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may become a big hit (expected degree) by displaying the light emission in the color corresponding to the determined effect pattern after the movement is displayed at the display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See FIGS. 40-25 (C) to (F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYA-1 is determined in the advance notice effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when the pattern PYA-2 is determined, light is emitted. The display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, and when the pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when the pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed. Displayed in red. Therefore, the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E having the highest expectation of big hit is red. The emission color can be changed in various ways, and if the jackpot is confirmed, the emission color may be changed to gold, rainbow, or the like.

(Notice production B)
The notice effect B can be executed when the base is in a high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a big hit depending on whether the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. It is suggested that there is a possibility (expectation).

Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (FIG. 40-34 (A)). ~ (C)). Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (FIGS. 40-34 (D)). ~ (F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIGS. 40-33). (A)-(C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIGS. 40-33). (D)-(F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When the pattern PYB-2 is displayed and the pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed. 1 Pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second effect. It is moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, the movement display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed has a higher jackpot expectation than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved, and the movement display pattern having the highest jackpot expectation is the first. The pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

Further, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is second. It is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development production A)
In the development effect A, the on-board movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the effect position, so that the development to a weak super reach is notified (see FIG. 40-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32 that has been moved from the origin position to the effect position rises from the effect position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

More specifically, when the execution is decided in the development effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the effect start timing, and thus develops into a weak super reach. Is notified (see FIG. 40-25 (H)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development notification image Z300 is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the development to weak super reach is notified. (See Fig. 40-25 (G)). That is, when the non-execution is determined by the development effect A type determination process, the effect pattern for notifying the development to the weak super reach is determined by displaying the development notification image Z300 without dropping the mounted movable body 32. Is.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is the same as the movable body. Unlike the pseudo-movable body display that is moved and displayed, it is an image (display) that imitates only the effect unit 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the effect start timing, the display is displayed at the effect display position corresponding to the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 from the beginning without accompanying the movement display.

(Development suggestion production)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position. After that, light is emitted based on the fact that the repeated hitting operation is detected during the operation valid period in which the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B (the operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period) is valid. By changing the display units Z208A to Z208E to the emission display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310 described later, that is, the development effect B may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B during the operation effective period in which the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion effect is effective). Is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the button LED 62 (see FIG. 40-2) built in the push button 31B is turned on to promote the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B. The image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period.

Further, in the second pseudo movable body display Z200 which is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the character image Z310 related to the model is first specified in the display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) on the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See FIGS. 40-26 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 40-27 (A)).

Specifically, when the pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E remain white even when the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When the pattern PS-2 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E change in the order of white → blue according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-3 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. Changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B. It changes in the order of green → red. Therefore, the final emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E having the highest execution expectation of the development effect B is red.

The emission color and the change pattern of the emission color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the emission color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or may be a emission display color other than white from the beginning. .. Further, the number of lights of the plurality of light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is increased according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, so that the higher the number of lights is, the higher the expectation of execution of the development effect B is higher than when the number of lights is small. You may. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the emission color and the number of emissions.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period, or when the continuous striking operation amount is small, even if any of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the continuous striking operation amount depends on the continuous striking operation amount. Illustrated a form in which the emission display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to 4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period. Alternatively, even when the amount of repeated hitting operations is small, the emission display color may be changed according to the determined patterns PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the operation valid period ends.

Further, as the character image Z310 displayed after the operation valid period ends, the character image Z310 having a color corresponding to the light emission display color of the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends is displayed. There is.

It should be noted that the character images Z310 of different types may be displayed according to the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends. Further, even if the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E does not change even though any of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined as described above, the determined patterns PS-2 to 4 are also determined. The character image Z310 (a color different from the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E) may be displayed according to the color corresponding to the character image Z310. Further, the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development production B)
In the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the determined effect (game). (Contents that are advantageous to the person) are notified (see FIG. 40-27 (D)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (FIG. 40-27 (FIG. 40-27). D)-(F)).

Further, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the reach title is set in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an manner indicating that it is the time when the display of the image is started, the variable display result becomes a big hit (controlled to the big hit gaming state). ) Is suggested.

Specifically, when the execution is decided in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is changed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing. By displaying the movement, the development to strong super reach is notified (see FIG. 40-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed in the state of preparation to inform the development of strong super reach (see FIG. 40-27 (C)). That is, the fact that non-execution is determined by the development effect B type determination process means that the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the prepared state without moving the second pseudo movable body display Z200, so that the strong super reach is achieved. It is to determine the production pattern that informs the development of.

(Decisive production)
The deciding effect is to settle the battle confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character, which was executed in the super reach effect, and notify whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after displaying that the ally character gives the final blow to the enemy character, the operation promotion display of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is performed to the player, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. By moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation valid period ends, the enemy character Either the jackpot confirmation notification that defeats the player and wins the battle, or the loss confirmation notification that the mounted movable body 32 is defeated by the enemy character without being moved from the origin position to the production position and is defeated in the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is out of order, and the pattern KB-2, which is a pattern in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character and is defeated in the battle is notified. KV-2 is selected when the variable display result is a big hit, and is a pattern in which a big hit confirmation notification is performed in which a ally character defeats an enemy character and wins the battle.

Further, in the patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Then, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

Further, when the execution of the pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the fall timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to and returning to the origin position from the effect position, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position to change the decorative pattern. The display resumes. Then, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit (FIG. 40). -29 (E)-(G), see FIGS. 40-30 (A)-(F)).

On the other hand, when the execution of the pattern KB-1 or KV-1 is decided, the mounted movable body 32 does not move from the origin position at the fall timing of the mounted movable body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. The loss confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result is lost (see FIGS. 40-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, about the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 in the super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status. , 40-11 will be described. FIG. 40-11 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation of a big hit for each execution status of the development effect A and the development effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 40-11, the pattern A is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is non-executed and development effect B is execution, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is non-execution, and pattern D is. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set so as to increase in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C <pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. Further, the ratio at which the development effect A and the development effect B are executed is controlled to the jackpot game state more than when the development effect A is executed without the development effect B being executed (big hit expectation). Is high. Further, when the development effect A and the development effect B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation degree) is higher than when the development effect A and the development effect B are not executed.

FIG. 40-18 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 241SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277), and when it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a superreach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). Y), the advance notice effect type determination process shown in FIG. 40-19 is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the advance notice effect A or the advance notice effect B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and FIG. 40- The development effect A type determination process shown in 21 (A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When it is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 40-19, in the advance notice effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice production is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Either of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In addition, the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is in the low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in the low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the advance effect effect. Is extracted, and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect A is determined using the advance notice effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 40-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, when it is not in the low base state, that is, in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), the random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and the notice effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 40-20 (B) is extracted. Is used to determine the effect pattern of the advance notice effect B (step 241SGS304).

As shown in FIG. 40-20 (A), in the notice effect A type determination table, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-20 (A).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYA-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". Eight determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and two determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined at the highest ratio when a probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and "Pattern" is determined when a non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYA-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. That is, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PYA-4"> "Pattern PYA-3"> "Pattern PYA-2"> "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 40-20 (B), in the notice effect B type determination table, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-20 (B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". Eight determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and two determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, the "pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest ratio when the probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and the "pattern" is determined when the non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PYB-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYB-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. That is, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest expectation of jackpot, and "Pattern PYB-3"> "Pattern PYB-3"> "Pattern PYB-2"> "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest expectation of jackpot. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same is illustrated between the advance notice effect A type determination table for the low base state and the advance notice effect B type determination table for the high base state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different between the advance notice effect A type determination table and the advance notice effect B type determination table.

Returning to FIG. 40-19, in step 241SGS305, the advance notice effect type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect (step 241SGS306), and the process is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-21, in the development effect A type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the development effect A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or. It suffices to specify whether it is out of order by the variable display result specification command, and specify whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It should be noted that the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the development effect A.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development effect type, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect A using the development effect A type determination table shown in FIG. 40-21 (B) (step 241SGS312). ).

As shown in FIG. 40-21 (B), in the development effect A type determination table, the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A) for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns. B, Probability change jackpot C), non-probability change jackpot, super reach loss, normal reach loss, different judgment values are shown in FIG. 40-21 (B). It is assigned to be the number of values.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". That is, if the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because the weak super reach effect is not developed.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot, "execution" is determined at the highest ratio, and when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is missed. "Non-execution" is determined at the highest rate. That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the development effect A is executed than when it is not executed. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-21 (A), in step 241SGS313, the development effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development effect A (step 241SGS314), and the process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 40-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and super reach fluctuation. When it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), the development suggestion effect type determination process shown in FIG. 40-22 (A) is executed, and the effect pattern (effect type) of the development suggestion effect is determined in the variable display (step). 241SGS280), the development effect B type determination process shown in FIG. 40-23 (A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and FIG. The effect pattern (effect type) of the determined effect is determined in the variable display by executing the determined effect B type determination process shown in A) (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 40-22 (A), in the development suggestion effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice production is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Either of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In addition, the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development suggestion effect using the development suggestion effect type determination table shown in FIG. 40-22 (B) (step 241SGS322). ).

As shown in FIG. 40-22 (B), in the development suggestion effect type determination table, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-20 (A).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PS-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, the "pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest ratio when the probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and the "pattern" is determined when the non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is out of order, "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. That is, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PS-4"> "Pattern PS-3"> "Pattern PS-2"> "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-22 (A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion effect type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development suggestion effect (step 241SGS324), and the process is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-23 (A), in the development effect B type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice production is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Either of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In addition, the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect B using the development effect B type determination table shown in FIG. 40-23 (B) (step 241SGS332). ..

As shown in FIG. 40-23 (B), in the development effect B type determination table, the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A) for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns. B, Probability change jackpot C), non-probability change jackpot, super reach loss, normal reach loss, different judgment values are shown in FIG. 40-23 (B). It is assigned to be the number of values.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of the super reach β / γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. .. Further, when the variable display result is out of the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. That is, in the case where the super reach α is out of alignment, the development effect B is not executed because it does not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot, "execution" is determined at the highest ratio, and when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is missed. "Non-execution" is determined at the highest rate. That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the development effect B is executed than when it is not executed. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-23 (A), in step 241SGS333, the development effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development effect B (step 241SGS334), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 40-24 (A), in the determination effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination effect type shown in FIG. 40-24 (B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The production pattern of the determination effect is determined using the table (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined determined effect type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the determined effect (step 241SGS343), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 40-24 (B), in the determination effect type determination table, an operation promotion display is performed in which the operation of the push button 31B is enabled and the player is encouraged to perform a single push operation of the push button 31B. "KB-1", "Pattern KB-2", "Pattern KV-1", "Pattern KV-" that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and displays an operation promotion display to the player to promote the single pulling operation of the stick controller 31A. For each of 2 ”, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, and super reach is lost. Different determination values are assigned so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-24 (B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. When the variable display result is out of the super reach β / γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to the “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to the “pattern KV-1”. Is assigned.

When the determination value is assigned in this way and a probability variation jackpot occurs in the variable display, the "pattern KV-1" whose operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest ratio, and the non-probability variation jackpot is determined. In the case of, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest ratio, and in the case of being out of super reach, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. Is determined at the highest rate. That is, the probability variation jackpot expectation is higher when the stick controller 31A is the operation target than when the push button 31B is the operation target. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this feature unit 241SG, the random number for determining the advance notice effect, the random number for determining the development effect A, the random number for determining the development suggestion effect, the random number for determining the development effect B, and the random number for determining the determined effect are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, respectively. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, although it is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100 of the number of judgment values of these various effect determination random numbers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various effect determination random numbers and the like are appropriate. You just have to decide. Further, a random number counter for determining the effect for generating these various random numbers for determining the effect is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for determining the effect is updated every time the timer is interrupted by the random number update process. Further, a common random number may be used as these various random numbers for determining the effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the effect patterns of various effects are determined in the various effect type determination processes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a character appears in addition to the above effects. It may be decided to execute a notice effect such as a character notice effect, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes stepwise, and a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. In the case of determining, since the timing for starting the advance notice effect differs depending on the mode of the advance notice effect, a different period may be set according to the mode of the advance notice effect in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 40-18, in step 241SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 241SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the variable display image data including the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of production operation of Super Reach β)
Next, an example of the effect of Super Reach β will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-25 to 40-31. 40-25 are diagrams in which (A) to (H) show an example of the effect of super reach β mainly in normal reach. 40-26 are diagrams in which (A) to (J) show an example of a directing operation mainly in a weak super reach. 40-27 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation in the same weak super reach. 40-28 are diagrams (A) to (D) showing an example of a directing operation mainly in a strong super reach. 40-29 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a strong super reach effect in FIGS. 40-29. 40-30 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation after the big hit confirmation notification. 40-31 are diagrams (A) to (D) showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display. FIG. 40-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Hereinafter, various production operation examples in the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40-25 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a variable manner based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. To start. Further, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "2"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), and the small corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying a symbol (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and a small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Regarding the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, the small symbol, and the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are duplicated, and the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the small number are duplicated. While it is possible to prevent the visibility of the symbol and the error display from being lowered, the decorative symbol is displayed on the back side (lower layer) of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. Therefore, it is prevented that the decorative symbols overlap and the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is lowered.

After starting the variable display, when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode as shown in FIG. 40-25 (B), the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 40-25 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the advance notice effect A in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. After displaying in, it is moved to the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 40-25 (D)), and as shown in FIG. 40-25 (E), it is determined by the advance notice effect type determination process in step 241SGS278A. By causing the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E to emit light with the display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to 4), the advance notice effect A suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the emission display units Z208A to Z208A based on the pattern PYA-4. When the emission display color of the Z208E is emitted in red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size is increased according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second is displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the advance notice effect A ends. After that, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner slightly larger than the small symbol.

Then, when the non-execution of the development effect A is determined in the development effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (G), the mounted movable body is at the start timing of the development effect A. While holding the development notification image Z300 at the origin position without dropping the 32, the development notification image Z300 is displayed and the effect image Z61A is displayed around the development notification image Z61A to notify that the development to a weak super reach effect is developed. When the execution of the development effect A is decided, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (H), the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on at the start timing of the development effect A, and the mounted movable body is turned on. The 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around the effect image Z61B to notify that the effect image Z61B is developed into a weak super reach effect.

In the feature unit 241SG, when the on-board movable body 32 is dropped as the development effect A, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the on-board movable body 32 is not executed. Even if it is determined that the non-execution of (falling) is not performed, it is possible to notify that the development notification image Z300 will develop into a weak super reach effect by displaying the development notification image Z300.

As shown in FIGS. 40-26 (A), the effect control CPU 120 starts a weak super reach effect by displaying a character image Z310 or the like after the execution period of the development effect A ends, and also starts a second pseudo. After displaying the movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, the movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position, and the development suggestion effect is started (see FIGS. 40-26 (B)). At this time, a part of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the character image Z310.

Further, as a development suggestion effect, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is turned on. , Promotes the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-26 (C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. Then, when any of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination process of step 241SGS280, the push button 31B during the operation valid period is as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (D). The effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the repeated hitting operation (number of times the operation is detected), and the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E are changed every time a predetermined time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (E), the blackout display is used to darken the background image while maintaining the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E even after the operation valid period ends. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the light emission display color of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends is displayed at a position above the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasizing (see FIG. 40-26 (F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26 (G)), and then medium. After displaying the character image Z310 of the size (see FIG. 40-26 (H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26 (I)), and then the large size character image Z310 is displayed. The character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26 (J)).

In FIGS. 40-26 (E) to (J), in consideration of the appearance of the effect, the light emission display of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E is continued, but the effect image Z62 is preferably not displayed.

In this way, the character images Z310 having the same color as the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a manner of gradually increasing from the back side to the front side of the screen, and the small size, medium size, and large size character images Z310 are displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-26 (J) in FIGS. 40-27, the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By overlapping the Z200 on the front side of at least a part of the Z200 so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be visually recognized through the overlapped area, the expectation that the development effect B is executed is more preferable. Can be fanned.

Further, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed on the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. It can be preferably suggested that the development effect B is executed by displaying the character image Z310 while distracting the player's consciousness.

Further, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a mode of gradually increasing the size, at least the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the front side. Further, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a part of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-27 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific effect display position while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. 1 Erase (hide) without moving to the specific initial display position. Specifically, as an erasure display for emphasizing that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 has been erased, it is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by hiding it in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature unit 241SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-27 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 as the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. Although a mode of erasing (non-displaying) without moving from the display position to the first specific initial display position has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (F). When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may be erased (hidden) without moving from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one that is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed. While fading out the Z200, the Z200 may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position to be displayed and erased (hidden).

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-27 (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the development effect B. Here, when the non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS281, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is first specified as shown in FIG. 40-27 (C). The reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display having high transmittance and low visibility) while erasing without moving from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, we will inform you that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40-27 (D), when the execution of the development effect B is decided, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, we will inform you that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display unit Z207 including the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is displayed. It is displayed in a mode of rotating it clockwise in front view. Further, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E in FIGS. 40-27 (D) do not suggest a jackpot expectation, unlike the development suggestion effect, and are displayed on the image display device 5 as an image of a weak reach effect. The emission display color is set according to the color of the effect image Z65 or the like displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-27 (E), after displaying the reach title image Z51 described later in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display having high transmittance and low visibility), FIG. 40- As shown in 27 (F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-28 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the super reach display mode, the reach title indicating the type of super reach effect and the reach indicating the jackpot expectation level are shown. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has been developed. Next, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an image Z52 in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 40-28 (B)). Then, when the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 are determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the super reach display mode is set, that is, the operation target is a push button. In the case of 31B, as shown in FIG. 40-28 (C), an operation promotion image Z53 for promoting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is displayed to the player. On the other hand, when the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 40-28 (D). The operation promotion image Z54 for promoting the pulling operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed on the player.

The timing or push when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period displaying the operation promotion display. If the variable display result is a big hit at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 40-29 (E), the mounted movable body 32 Is executed from the origin position to the effect position on the front side of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. Further, according to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is set to a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color). Make it emit light.

The effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which the glass is cracked and scattered, and the present invention illustrates a form similar to the effect image Z71 described later. The effect image is not limited to the above, and may be an effect image having a mode different from that of the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying only a part of the glass in a manner in which only a part of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments and the remaining part is left, the mounted movable body 32 is displayed overlapping with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in a situation where it is difficult to see, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to grasp what has happened over a period of time.

Further, also in the effect image Z55, similarly to the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattered manner is the mounted movable body 32 arranged on the front side of the image display device 5. By reflecting a part of the display, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the effect position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 40-29 (F), after displaying the image Z56 showing that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , As shown in FIG. 40-29 (G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation. Even if the combination of big hit symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-30 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and the glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo-movable. The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30 (B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D are displayed as the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. Further, it is the same as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 40-29 (E) according to the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. The speakers 8L and 8R are output with a predetermined sound effect, and the light emitting display unit Z108A is made to emit a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, the details of the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 described with reference to FIGS. 40-30 (A) and 40-30 (B) are shown in FIGS. 40-31. explain.

As shown in FIG. 40-31 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing a mode in which the glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5. At the same time, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. The effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a part of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be visually recognized below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-31 (B), when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, FIG. 40 The amount and moving display speed of the image Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased as compared with the state shown in −31 (A), and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed on the front side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 40-31 (C) and 40-31 (D), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position, the glass shards are more than those shown in FIGS. 40-31 (B). The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing the above are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100.

In this way, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 according to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed as the first initial display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. While displaying in the display area including the position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is moved from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. By displaying the image Z71A in a manner of being scattered around, not only can the image Z71A give a three-dimensional effect, but also the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be made to look as if it were a real structure.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIGS. 40-31 (C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is transparent to any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. The first pseudo-movable body display is displayed on any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed visually or displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-31 (D). By reflecting and displaying a part of the Z100, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-31 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then displays the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D as the first effect. While changing from the state to the second effect display state, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-32, after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 displays the light emitting display unit Z108A in the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, an effect period in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position as a blinking display pattern that is light-emitting for 33 ms) and then hidden for the second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33 ms). While repeating the process a plurality of times over ta1 to ta4, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for the first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then the second corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the second period is lit. The blinking pattern of turning off the light for 40 ms) is repeated a plurality of times over the production period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A at substantially the same cycle, the effect can be more preferably excited. It is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time for emitting and displaying the light emitting display unit Z108A (for example, 33 ms) and the time for lighting the mounted movable body LED 208 (for example, 30 ms) in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in some cases, for example, by making the extinguishing period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the difference between the light emitting display of the light emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 becomes large as time passes. Can be prevented.

Further, during the effect periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration effect may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the production can be made more exciting. The drive of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 40-30 (C), the effect control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second effect display state to the first effect display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative symbol. After temporarily stopping and displaying in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. 40-30 (D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed upward, and FIG. As shown in E), it is erased after moving to the first effect display position and displaying. Then, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols.

In this way, the jackpot gaming state is controlled by executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to perform the jackpot confirmation notification, and then executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100. Can be more preferably felt by the player.

Returning to FIG. 40-29, a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (from the stick controller 31A) during the operation valid period displaying the operation promotion display. If the variable display result is off at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or when the operation valid period ends without detecting the single push operation of the push button 31B or the single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, FIG. 40-29. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed and the effect image Z57 is displayed without executing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area. As shown in FIG. 40-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 showing that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 40-29 (J), the combination of the missed symbols is displayed. Stop display is displayed and notification of disconnection confirmation is performed. In addition, the combination of the missed symbols is synchronized with the stop display, and the small symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the missed symbols.

For example, the operation timing of the push button 31B differs between the case where the push button 31B is operated at the start of the operation valid period and the case where the push button 31B is not operated during the operation valid period. The difference in scale caused by 1. 2. Period of shaking of the decorative design until the design is confirmed. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. It may be absorbed by extending or shortening any period of the effect period of the movable body effect.

(Example of production operation of Super Reach γ)
Next, an example of the effect of the super reach γ will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-33 to 40-34. 40-33 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. 40-34 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ.

In the following, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B executed in the normal reach effect in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ will be described, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach effect is the same as that of the super reach β. Therefore, the description is omitted. The super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 40-33 (A), when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved to the second intermediate effect display position (see FIG. 40-33 (B)) to perform a big hit. The notice effect B suggesting that the game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is variable in the decorative symbol display area 5L by being overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non-moves) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 40-33 (D), when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 40-33 (E)) to perform a big hit. The notice effect B suggesting that the game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is variable in the decorative symbol display area 5C by being overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C at the second specific effect display position. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non-moves) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 40-34 (A), when the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position and then moved to the first effect display position (see FIG. 40-34 (B)) to display the jackpot game state. The notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed is executed. Further, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the 5C and 5R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-34 (C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. do.

As shown in FIG. 40-34 (D), when the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the second initial display position and then moved to the second effect display position (see FIG. 40-34 (E)) to display the jackpot game state. The notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed is executed. Further, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the 5C and 5R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-34 (F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second effect display position to the second initial display position. do.

(Pseudo movable body display and movable body)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-35 to 40-40. 40-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 40-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 40-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display.

As shown in FIGS. 40-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is different from the mounted movable body 32 in form, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 40-14 (B). Although it is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both substantially the same position in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position. Since the effect positions of the mounted movable body 32 and the mounted movable body 32 are both lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the mounted movable body 32 are the origin. The direction of movement from the position to the effect position is the common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

As described with reference to FIGS. 40-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the effect position from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32. The moving distance to is longer than L1 (L2> L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 40-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) due to its own weight from the upper origin position to the lower effect position via the intermediate position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 40-35 (A) to (C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first effect display from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position. It takes about 100 ms to move and display the position. That is, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a longer movement display distance and is more than the movement from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. Is also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 can be mounted and moved as a structure that can be moved in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. When the movement display is possible from the same position as the body 32 in the same direction, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is the movement display of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the production position, it is possible to perform a production with an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 actually mounted, which surprises the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 (A') and 40-36 (B'), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has moved from the first origin position to the first effect position below the first origin position. Occasionally, the mechanism unit M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the moving body M106 and stops due to the downward movement being restricted, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a recoil operation (rebound) of a predetermined movement amount. It is said that the display imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 in which the above is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 (A) and 40-36 (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. When the stop display is performed at the effect display position, the recoil motion display (rebound display) of a specific movement amount is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the effect unit M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first effect position, the mechanism unit M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since it comes into contact with the upper part of the head and the downward movement is restricted, the mechanism unit M100B undergoes a recoil operation due to vibration before the effect unit M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the effect unit M100A to generate a recoil operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after performing the recoil operation display of the mechanism unit M100B. , As shown in FIG. 40-36 (B2), the recoil operation display of the effect unit M100A is performed. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display that imitates the mounted movable body 32). It can be moved and displayed in a different mode).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 (C') and 40-36 (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the effect unit 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and moves to the effect position. At that time, the mechanism unit 32B abuts on the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206 to restrict the downward movement, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount.

Next, the operation modes of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the determination effect will be described.

As described with reference to FIGS. 40-28 to 40-30, the effect control CPU 120 performs a movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the determined effect. After executing and performing the jackpot confirmation notification, it is possible to execute the pseudo movable body display in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-37 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines and starts the effect at the timing ta0, and then the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the operation valid period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position during the period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) of the timing ta1 to ta2, and then the recoil operation is performed during the period of the timing ta2 to ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

After that, at the timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the effect position to the origin position, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) of the timing ta4 to ta5 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position is the period of the timing ta1 to ta2 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position. Longer than TL1 (eg, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the effect position.

In this way, in the production using the mounted movable body 32 which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the production position in response to the operation detection of the player, the game is performed by dropping the mounted movable body 32 faster by its own weight. While it is possible to give an impact to a person, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the effect position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by the impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position at the timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot confirmation notification is performed, and the period TL2 (for example, the period ta6 to ta7) of the timing ta6 to ta7. After moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (about 100 ms), the recoil motion display is performed during the period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

After that, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position at the timing ta9, and then the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) of the timing ta9 to ta10 when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is first. It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) of the timing ta6 to ta7 for moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display. It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying.

As described above, in the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more than the movement display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner by making it the same as the mounted movable body 32, such as by increasing the speed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-37 (B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, so that the player can be surprised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-37 (C), the amount of movement of the first recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil operation display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved and displayed from the origin position to the effect position. Further, the number of recoil movements displayed on the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, 6 times) is larger than the number of recoil movements of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, 4 times). By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-38 (A) and 40-38 (B), the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the first non-mounted movable body The movement display distance L2 from the first origin position to the first effect display position of the M100 is the same, and the period TL2 for moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is The period for moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position is shorter than the period TL10 (TL2 <TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is the first non-mounted movable body M100. It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from one origin position to the first effect position. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position. Is also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having a faster impact than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, so that the player can be surprised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (C), the amount of movement of the first recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. In L12, the movement amount L11 of the first recoil operation display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 is the first from the first origin position. It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil operation display performed when the movement is displayed at the effect position. Further, the number of recoil movements displayed on the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, 6 times) is larger than the number of recoil movements (for example, 4 times) of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 simulates the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. It can be realized, and the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the effect position is displayed in an exaggerated manner. It is possible to provide a production that leaves a lasting impression on the person.

In the feature unit 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is The first recoil motion and the recoil motion display were compared, but any of the recoil motions and the recoil motion display after the second time may be compared, or the total or average movement amount of the multiple recoil motions and the recoil motion. It may be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

Further, the recoil motion exemplifies a form in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when the movable body is stopped at the second position, but includes the deformation or vibration of a predetermined portion of the movable body due to the recoil. ..

Next, as shown in FIGS. 40-39 (A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the effect position to the origin position, or the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first effect position to the first origin position. In this case, since a drive source such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R or M101 is used, the effect control CPU 120 timings the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 when the movement is started. The first period up to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. That is, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until the first period elapses after the start of movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in the second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are moved and displayed is from the timing tb1 at which the movement is started to the timing tb4 at which the movement is stopped, as shown in FIG. 40-39 (B). Since it is constant and the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are unnecessary, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed on the first non-mounted movable body M100. And the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be performed more smoothly.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-40.

As shown in FIGS. 40-40 (A) to 40-40 (C), when creating a moving image in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo is created. The first frame, which is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and the second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , Is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a moving image in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. , At least, for displaying the first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As described with reference to FIGS. 40-16, it is the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and is the first specification of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The movement display distance L3 from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 is longer than the movement display distance L3, but the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect. While the time required to move and display to the display position is about 100 ms, the time required to move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is about about 100 ms. Since it differs at 800 ms, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. 1 Faster than moving display to a specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIGS. 40-40 (A), FIG. 40- It is conceivable to display the second frame in the order shown in 40 (C), but the frame rate becomes low and the movement becomes rattling and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the interpolation frame 1 shown in FIG. 40-40 (B) is inserted as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the moving image is increased to increase the frame rate, and the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed for each display frame, the first initial display position, By performing the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position in this order, a natural and smooth movement display can be performed.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed at high speed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth movement display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without deteriorating the visibility.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 40-40 (A'), It is conceivable to display the second frame in the order shown in FIG. 40-40 (B'), but the frame rate becomes low and the movement becomes rattling and unnatural.

Therefore, in order to display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position between the first frame and the second frame. As an input image, a plurality of interpolated frames (not shown) are inserted to increase the number of frames of the moving image to increase the frame rate to realize a natural and smooth moving display, and the first specification of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By performing the movement display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved and displayed at a speed slower than that of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without deteriorating the visibility.

Further, for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When PBY-4 to be moved and displayed is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, the pattern PBY- 1. The ratio controlled to the big hit state (big hit expectation) is different from that when PBY-2 is executed, so that the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is different between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second. The pseudo movable body display Z200 can be recognized by the player due to the difference in the speed of the movement display.

Further, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the PBY-4 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position when is executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (big hit expectation) is higher than when is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be noticed.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position on the image display device 5. An example of a mode in which a recoil motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount is performed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 40-34 (D) to (E), an image display is performed. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stopped and displayed at the second effect display position by the device 5, a recoil operation display of a predetermined movement amount ( Bounce display) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 (A) to (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When the second intermediate effect display position is stopped and displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 40-33 (D) to (E), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position on the image display device 5. When the movement is displayed at the second specific effect display position and the stop display is performed at the second specific effect display position, a recoil operation display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

Further, in the notice effect B, the recoil operation display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position is a notice. In the effect A, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the recoil operation display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, since the amount of movement of the advance notice effect B is larger than that of the advance notice effect A, the movement display can be performed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position after the pattern PBY-3 of the advance notice effect B or the big hit notification of the determined effect is performed. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in the pattern PBY-4 of the advance notice effect B. .. By doing so, the recoil motion display becomes larger when the downward movement display is performed than when the upward movement display is performed, so that the movement display can be performed in a more realistic manner.

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect position and the mounted movable body 32 are the origin positions. The direction of movement from to the effect position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. big.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised by the fact that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32.
Further, since it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to realize with the mounted movable body 32 and to move and display at a plurality of speeds, it is possible to diversify the effect.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the moving speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison of the speed between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison of speed with movement. That is, in the case of comparing the speeds of the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display and the movement of the movable body, the pseudo-movable body display and the type of the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 in which a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount is performed when moving from the first origin position to the first effect position. The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the direction, and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, a predetermined amount of movement is displayed. The reaction motion display (rebound display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. Is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the recoil motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the recoil motion amount of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison of the recoil motion display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the recoil motion of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body. It may be a comparison between the recoil motion display of the display Z200 and the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32. That is, in the case of comparing the amount of movement between the reactionary motion display of the pseudo-movable body display and the recoil motion of the movable body, the pseudo-movable body display and the type of the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed that the development effect A, which is a movable body effect, and the development effect B, which is a pseudo-movable body display effect, are executed.
When the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than that of the game including the case where the development effect A and the development effect B are controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a rate of 100% when the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In addition, it suggests the possibility that the advance notice effect A that announces the possibility (expectation degree) that the variable display result will be a big hit, the development effect B that notifies that the variable display result will develop into a strong super reach effect, and the development effect B will be executed. It is possible to execute the development suggestion effect, and in the advance notice effect A, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display is displayed. After moving from the position to the first specific initial display position and then hiding it, in the development effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific effect display position, and then from the first specific effect display position. The second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden before the development effect B is executed by hiding the movement display to the first specific initial display position. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the advance notice effect A, since the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves and displays in the same manner as the movable body as a structure, whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same manner as the movable body, from the first specific effect display position. Since the display is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of the execution of the development effect B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies that the deciding effect is executed. When the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then the first specific effect display is displayed. A display area including the first specific effect display position, in which the reach title image Z51 suggesting the execution of the development effect B is hidden without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the determined effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then the display is performed. It is hidden after being moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position.
According to this feature, before the determination effect is executed, the second display of the suggestive image is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same manner as the movable body as a structure. Since it is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of execution of the decision effect, while in the decision effect, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is the same as the movable body. Since the movement is displayed in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In the feature unit 241SG, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the determined effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo-movable body display may be moved between the specific effect and the special effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame, the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the like. And the first effect display position, and in the display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which the glass is cracked and the image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed quickly without deteriorating the visibility, and the movement display is emphasized by a specific image to give a suitable impression to the player. Can be attached.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame, the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the like. And the first effect display position, and the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the advance notice effect B, which is faster than the movement display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is changed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second. The ratio controlled to the jackpot state (big hit expectation) differs between when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is different. The player can be made to recognize the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the movement display.
In the notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the pattern PBY-3 are moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. A big hit when the pattern PBY-4 to be executed is executed and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. The difference in the ratio controlled to the state (expected jackpot) is that the percentage controlled to the jackpot state when the pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 is executed in the advance notice B is 100%, and the pattern PBY- When 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0%, or when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the advance notice effect B, the jackpot state is controlled. This includes the case where the ratio is 100% and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

Further, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 a display image having not only the effect display units Z100A and Z200A but also the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, the movable body operates by the drive mechanism. While it is possible to express the body more realistically and realize a movable body display effect similar to the movable body effect, with regard to the movement display, not only the movement display is performed in the same manner as the movement of the movable body, but also the movable body is displayed. Then, by making it possible to move and display a mode that is difficult to realize due to reasons such as a complicated mechanism and an increase in cost, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the production.

In addition, the feature unit 241SG erases (hides) the movement display in a mode that is difficult to realize with a movable body, without displaying the high-speed movement, the deformed display, and the return display from the effect display position to the initial display position. Although the above is illustrated, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo-movable body display and unrealistically displaying the moving display.

In particular, since the pseudo movable body display moved to the effect display position can be hidden or displayed at a desired timing, for example, the movable body as a structure moved to the effect display position is returned to the origin position. At that time, it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to hiding of other production images, and it is possible to start the next production immediately, which has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in production design. Play.

Further, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is the first non-mounted movable body M100. Is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, so that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100. It is possible to realize the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the above, and exaggerate the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position. By displaying in the above-mentioned manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, since the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is mounted. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, the pseudo movable body display includes the effect display units Z100A and Z200A and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B are more than the effect display units Z100A and Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32, so that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various modes.

Further, the movement period between the origin position and the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display is included. Since the period does not include the first period and the second period, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A in substantially the same cycle. , The player can be made to pay attention to the first pseudo movable body display Z100 which is moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not emit light from the light emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, so that the incomplete first pseudo movable body display Z100 during the moving display is seen. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A in substantially the same cycle. , The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position, and is second in the advance notice effect A. The pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is secondly specified from the second specific initial display position in the advance notice effect B. By moving to the effect display position and displaying differently from the right direction, one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, so the player can create an unexpected effect that is difficult to achieve with a movable body. Can be provided to.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from that of the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-41. 40-41 is a diagram showing modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG in FIGS. 40-41.

In the feature unit 241SG, as described with reference to FIG. 40-25, in the advance notice effect A, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, it is displayed. An example is illustrated in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position as the development effect A after moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and then erasing.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 40-41 (D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and a part of the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, that is, the mounted movable body is moved to the effect position. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and the second pseudo. When the movement display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is overlapped. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not a structure but a display body, and the interest of the production is lowered.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 40-41 (A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After displaying (see FIG. 40-41 (B)), by erasing without moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 40-41 (C)), FIG. 40 As shown in −41 (D), it may be avoided that the mounted movable body 32 moved from the origin position to the effect position as the development effect A overlaps with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-42. 40-42 are views (A) to (H) showing a modification 2 of the feature portion 241SG.

In the feature unit 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position and the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and below the first position. The direction of movement between the second position and the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as the second modification is moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position above the first display position. , Is a common direction (for example, in the vertical direction), the movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo movable body display Z402 is the second from the first position of the mounted movable body 401. It should be faster than moving to a position.

Further, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward direction). And may be in different directions.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention Is not limited to this, and as in the second modification, by executing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body 401 are simulated. It may be possible to perform an effect using the movable body display Z402.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-42, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure in which the characters "go" are displayed, and the second upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. It is possible to move between one position and a second position below the first position, and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as the second modification are the first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. And the second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as the second modification can display the characters of "body" and is an image display device. It is possible to move and display between the first display position at the bottom of the display area 5 and the second display position above the first display position. The detailed drive mechanism of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R will not be illustrated or described.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned advance notice effects A, B, development effects A, B, etc., first, FIG. As shown in FIG. 40-42 (A), with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R standing by at the first position, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (B), the pseudo movable body display is displayed. After displaying Z402 at the first display position, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (C), the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z 402 so that the mounted movable body 401 does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays the pseudo movable body display Z402 to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is simulated. The closest to the movable body display Z402, a pseudo-coalescence state in which the characters "coalescence" can be recognized is obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (F), while maintaining the pseudo-union state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed. By moving the display upward and further moving the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to the second predetermined position, it is notified that the effect is developed due to the success of the pseudo-coalescence.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position and the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is set as the first display position. Is moved and displayed by dividing the image into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased by frame-out or fade-out on the left and right sides of the screen.

On the other hand, when it is decided to notify that the pseudo-coalescence is not successful and the effect does not develop, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved downward and pseudo-movable. In the middle of displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is stopped while decelerating, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in such a manner that the upper part is destroyed. Notify that the pseudo coalescence is not successful and the production does not develop. As described above, in the pseudo-movable body display Z402, it is possible to easily realize an effect in a mode that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Modification example 3)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-43. 40-43 are views (A) to (C) showing a modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG.

In the feature unit 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 illustrates a mode in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. The present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to one capable of reciprocating movement display in one direction such as a vertical direction or a horizontal direction. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 40-43 ( A) As shown in (B), after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. 40-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction in which the movement is displayed from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (C), in the first effect display position, what is a linear movement display in one direction, such as displaying only the effect display unit Z200A vertically around a rotation axis that faces the left-right direction? It is preferable to be able to execute various modes of movement display, such as different rotational movement displays and movement displays in a mode of moving toward another direction (for example, a depth direction) different from one direction. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the feature portion 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Is also included in the present invention.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
In the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of devices other than the mounted movable body 32 are used. The movable body may be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the frame is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on a game machine frame 3 or an opening / closing door capable of opening and closing the game machine frame 3. A pseudo movable body display that imitates a side movable body may be movable and displayed. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device provided in connection with the game.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that are planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but are not mounted is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are scheduled to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they are not mounted. May be good.

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are hidden in a manner of gradually fading out when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are erased. The effect image that emphasizes the erasure may be displayed, and the erasure may be performed by a method other than these.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect display position is the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position. It is shorter than that, and when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, a common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed, and is common. Although the form of outputting the effect sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position is set to the first of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the moving display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and has a different mode depending on whether the mounted movable body 32 moves or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. It may be displayed and a different sound effect may be output. By doing so, it is possible to make the movement of the mounted movable body 32 stand out by utilizing the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, in the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times as the development effect A and the effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , The notice effect B and the determined effect can be executed up to 2 times, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed up to 4 times of the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect B, the development suggestion effect, and the development effect B. Although a certain form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of execution of the movement display of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display may be executed a number of times other than the above number of times.

Further, when the movable body can be moved the first time in one variable display period, the pseudo-movable body display can be moved a second time more than the first time in one variable display period. preferable. By doing so, instead of increasing the execution opportunity of the movable body effect too much and lowering the jackpot expectation, by increasing the execution opportunity of the pseudo movable body display, the effect is reduced. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

In addition to the above-mentioned plurality of effects, for example, the pseudo movable body display may be moved and displayed at the time of symbol promotion in the re-lottery after the big hit confirmation notification, or during the big hit middle effect. The movable body display may be a pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

Further, the advance notice effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state, the development effect B is applied as a notification effect for notifying the content advantageous to the player, and the notification effect is executed. A development suggestion effect is applied as a suggestion predetermined effect, a determined effect is applied as a special effect notifying that the special effect is controlled to an advantageous state, and it is suggested that the special effect is executed before the special effect is executed. Although the embodiment in which the notice effect B is applied is illustrated as the specific effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects other than the above can be applied. Further, although these various effects can be executed in the variable display period of one super reach, the effects may be executed over a plurality of variable display periods.

In addition, the contents that are advantageous for the player are, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, pseudo-ream, big hit, small hit, reach, hold ream, chance-up production, pre-reading notice production, time-saving loss, ceiling time-saving control, etc., which will be described later. , Variable display results, controls and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winning, assist time (AT) winning, replay time (RT) winning, bonus winning and the like may be included.

Further, when the feature unit 241SG starts displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the game board 2 and the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 are displayed. By reducing or turning off the brightness, the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed. When erasing, the game for the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is performed by increasing or lighting the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. It can distract the person's consciousness.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 can be adjusted by the player's operation, while the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. It is preferable that the amount of light of the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E of the light emitting display unit Z108A and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 cannot be adjusted by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being spoiled or inconspicuous.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden in the development suggestion effect, the display area including the first specific effect display position is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image is an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If there is, an image other than the character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, in the development effect B, as a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the determined effect, a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the mode at the start of display is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. An image other than the reach title image (for example, a character image appearing in a strong super reach effect or a determined effect) may be used as long as the suggested image suggests the execution of the determined effect. ..

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, an embodiment in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed in different periods is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a plurality of pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, the movable displayable range of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 overlaps in the overlapping area. And the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, one of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed on the display layer on the front side of the other, so that they can be displayed on each other. Since it is possible to make people aware of the front-back positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic production.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, it is considered that the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 and displayed. Then, the mounted movable body, the center decorative frame, or the like may be arranged so as to cover the portion where the display of the mechanism display unit of the pseudo movable body display is started in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body may be movable. It may be difficult to visually recognize the portion where the display of the mechanical display unit of the pseudo movable body display is started by moving the body.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which "time reduction loss" is included as a display result of the variable display is illustrated, but the CPU 103 describes a predetermined condition (for example, a flag stored in the RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6). Variable display has been performed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.) from the time when the counter or buffer is cleared, the jackpot game state is controlled, or the display result is set to be out of time. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute ceiling time reduction control that controls the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state (for example, 900 times) by the ceiling time reduction control is the same as the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). May be different.

When the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without satisfying the above-mentioned predetermined conditions, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second. Pseudo-movable body display The moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as Z200 may be executable. In this way, it may be possible to execute the movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification such as the big hit notification, the notification of the loss of time reduction, the notification of the ceiling time reduction control, and the type and movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification. The mode and the like may be different.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed as a notification of a big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a small hit or a time saving. In the case of disconnection or when the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is used to notify the small hit or the time reduction and the ceiling time reduction control. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a short hit, or if the display result of the variable display is a big hit, a common type of pseudo-movable body display is used for notification, but the movement display is used. The mode may be different. In addition, depending on the case where the display result of the variable display is a small hit or the time reduction is off, and the case where the display result of the variable display is a big hit, the pseudo-movable body display is used to notify, but the type of the pseudo-movable body display is It may be different.

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which a so-called one type of pachinko gaming machine capable of being controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game is applied as a pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , A so-called type 1 or 2 type of gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in a short time state after the jackpot game is completed, and the game playability can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for the game. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is added. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 32 Mounted movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU for
200 Dispensing device 202 1st guide passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 1st passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover body 271A to 271H Holes 314,324,334 Cover part 340 Ball stop member N1 to 6,11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A storage unit that can store game media and
A payout unit that can pay out game media,
A guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, and a cover portion.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion.
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the payout portion.
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images